Answers for industry.
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120
Frequenzumrichter
SINAMICS G120
SINAMICS G120D
Function Manual · 08/2011
Frequency converter
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_______________
_
__
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120, SINAMICS
G120D
Frequency converter
Function Manual
Edition 08/2011, Firmware version V3.2
08/2011 - FW 3.2
A5E01137279B AD
Introduction
1
Safety Notes
2
Product Line
3
Parameter
Assignment/Addressing
4
BICO Technology
5
Common Inverter Functions
6
Functions only available with
G120 inverters
7
Fail-Safe Functions
8
Power module dependent
functions
9
List of Abbreviations
A
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
A5E01137279B AD
Ⓟ 08/2011
Copyright © Siemens AG 2007, /,
2008, /, 2011.
Technical data subject to change
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 3
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.1 Documents for the Inverter ............................................................................................................7
1.2 Description of Document Classes..................................................................................................8
2 Safety Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Product Line ............................................................................................................................................ 13
3.1 Global System Overview..............................................................................................................13
3.2 Function Overview .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing ......................................................................................................... 19
4.1 Overview of Parameters ..............................................................................................................19
4.2 Write parameters .........................................................................................................................20
4.3 Monitoring parameters .................................................................................................................20
4.4 Parameter Attributes ....................................................................................................................21
5 BICO Technology .................................................................................................................................... 27
5.1 BICO Technology Overview.........................................................................................................27
5.2 Using BICO technology................................................................................................................27
6 Common Inverter Functions..................................................................................................................... 31
6.1 Motor Data Identification..............................................................................................................31
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP) ..................................................................................................34
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down...............................................................................................................38
6.4 JOG..............................................................................................................................................41
6.5 Monitoring Functions....................................................................................................................44
6.5.1 General monitoring functions and messages ..............................................................................44
6.5.2 Load torque monitoring................................................................................................................47
6.5.3 Power Module Protection.............................................................................................................49
6.5.3.1 General Overload Monitoring.......................................................................................................49
6.5.3.2 Power Module Thermal Monitoring..............................................................................................50
6.5.4 Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses...................................................................52
6.5.4.1 Thermal motor protection without sensor ....................................................................................55
6.5.4.2 Thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor.........................................................................57
6.5.4.3 Thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor ..........................................................................57
6.5.4.4 Thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor .................................................................58
6.6 Restart Functions.........................................................................................................................59
6.6.1 Automatic restart..........................................................................................................................59
6.6.2 Flying restart ................................................................................................................................62
6.7 Data Sets .....................................................................................................................................66
Table of contents
Frequency converter
4 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes ......................................................................................................... 74
6.8.1 Motor Holding Brake ................................................................................................................... 75
6.8.2 Instantaneous brake.................................................................................................................... 80
6.9 Setpoint Channel......................................................................................................................... 82
6.9.1 Summation and modification of frequency setpoint.................................................................... 83
6.9.2 Ramp-function generator ............................................................................................................ 86
6.9.3 OFF/Braking Functions ............................................................................................................... 90
6.9.4 Manual and Automatic Operation ............................................................................................... 94
6.9.5 FFBs and Fast FFBs ................................................................................................................... 96
6.9.6 Wobble Generator..................................................................................................................... 105
6.10 Control Functions ...................................................................................................................... 108
6.10.1 Open-loop and closed-loop control overview............................................................................ 108
6.10.2 V/f Control ................................................................................................................................. 108
6.10.2.1 Voltage boost ............................................................................................................................ 113
6.10.2.2 Slip compensation..................................................................................................................... 116
6.10.2.3 V/f resonance damping ............................................................................................................. 117
6.10.2.4 V/f control with FCC .................................................................................................................. 118
6.10.2.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)............................................................................................... 120
6.10.3 Vector Control ........................................................................................................................... 122
6.10.3.1 Vector Control without Speed Encoder..................................................................................... 124
6.10.3.2 Vector control with speed encoder............................................................................................ 132
6.10.3.3 Speed controller ........................................................................................................................ 138
6.10.3.4 Closed-loop torque control........................................................................................................ 143
6.10.3.5 Closed-loop torque control (SLVC) ........................................................................................... 145
6.10.3.6 Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control........................................................................ 147
6.10.3.7 Limiting the torque setpoint....................................................................................................... 149
7 Functions only available with G120 inverters......................................................................................... 153
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control....................................................................................................................... 153
7.1.1 Siemens standard control (P0727 = 0) .....................................................................................155
7.1.2 2-wire control (P0727 = 1)......................................................................................................... 157
7.1.3 3-wire control (P0727 = 2)......................................................................................................... 158
7.1.4 3-wire control (P0727 = 3)......................................................................................................... 159
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies................................................................................................. 161
7.3 PID Controller............................................................................................................................ 165
7.3.1 PID dancer roll control............................................................................................................... 170
7.3.2 PID Motorized Potentiometer.................................................................................................... 174
7.3.3 Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies.......................................................................................... 175
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)....................................................................................................................... 178
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)................................................................................................................... 181
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter)................................................................................................... 183
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)................................................................................................. 185
8 Fail-Safe Functions................................................................................................................................ 187
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions ............................................................................................ 187
8.1.1 Permissible applications for the fail-safe functions ................................................................... 189
8.1.2 Application examples for fail-safe functions.............................................................................. 191
8.1.3 Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands .......................................................................... 193
Table of contents
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 5
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions ...............................................................................................194
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS ...............................................................................................196
8.4 Safe Torque Off .........................................................................................................................203
8.5 Safe Stop 1 ................................................................................................................................207
8.6 Safely Limited Speed .................................................................................................................212
8.6.1 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 0...................................................................................................216
8.6.2 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 1...................................................................................................224
8.6.3 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 2...................................................................................................232
8.6.4 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 3...................................................................................................237
8.7 Safe Brake Control.....................................................................................................................245
9 Power module dependent functions....................................................................................................... 247
9.1 Electronic Brakes .......................................................................................................................247
9.1.1 DC braking .................................................................................................................................248
9.1.2 Compound braking.....................................................................................................................252
9.2 Dynamic Brakes.........................................................................................................................254
9.2.1 Dynamic braking ........................................................................................................................254
9.2.2 Regenerative braking.................................................................................................................259
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller ........................................................................................................261
9.3.1 Closed-loop Vdc control.............................................................................................................261
9.3.2 Vdc_max controller ....................................................................................................................262
9.3.3 Kinetic buffering .........................................................................................................................263
A List of Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................. 265
A.1 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................265
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 269
Table of contents
Frequency converter
6 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 7
Introduction 1
1.1 Documents for the Inverter
Available technical documentation
Comprehensive information and support tools are available from the Service and Support
internet site
● http://support.automation.siemens.com
You find there the following types of documentation:
● Getting Started
● Operating Instructions
● Hardware Installation Manual
● Function Manual
● Parameter Manual
● Product Information
Further internet addresses
You can download the respective documents for your inverter under the following links:
● SINAMICS G110
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g110
● SINAMICS G120
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120
● SINAMICS G120D
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120d
Application examples
You find various application examples to the inverters under the following link:
● http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20208582/136000
Introduction
1.2 Description of Document Classes
Frequency converter
8 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
1.2 Description of Document Classes
Description of the documents
The following section describes the available document types for your inverter:
Brochure
The Brochure is advertising literature designed to introduce the product to the marketplace. It
contains a basic outline of the product with a brief overview of the technical capabilities of
the product.
Catalog
The Catalog presents information that allows the customer to select an appropriate inverter
including all available options. It contains detailed technical specifications, ordering and
pricing information to allow the customer to order the appropriate items for their application
or plant.
Getting Started
The Getting Started presents warnings, dimension drawings and a brief set up information
for the customer.
Operating Instructions
The Operating Instructions gives information about the features of the inverter. It gives
detailed information about commissioning, control modes, system parameters,
troubleshooting, technical specifications and the available options of the product.
Hardware Installation Manual
The Hardware Installation Manual gives information for the Power Modules regarding the
features of the product. It gives detailed information on installation, technical specifications,
dimension drawings and the available options from the product.
Function Manual
The Function Manual is a list of detailed information about the inverter's functions. It contains
descriptions of the internal components, modules and gates as well as examples for usage.
Moreover associated parameters and miscellaneous logic operations of the controls are
given.
Parameter Manual
The Parameter Manual contains a detailed description of all the parameters that can be
modified to adapt the inverter to specific applications. The Parameter Manual also contains a
series of function diagrams to diagrammatically portray the nature and interoperability of the
system parameters.
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 9
Safety Notes 2
Safety Instructions
The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are provided for your safety and as a means of
preventing damage to the product or components in the connected machines. This section
lists Warnings, Cautions and Notes, which apply generally when handling the inverter,
classified as General, Transport and Storage, Commissioning, Operation, Repair and
Dismantling and Disposal.
Specific Warnings, Cautions and Notes that apply to particular activities are listed at the
beginning of the relevant sections in this manual and are repeated or supplemented at
critical points throughout these sections.
Please read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal safety and will
also help prolong the service life of your inverter and the equipment to which it is connected.
Safety Notes
Frequency converter
10 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
General
WARNING
This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating
mechanical parts. Non-compliance with the warnings or failure to follow the instructions
contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage
to property.
Protection in case of direct contact by means of SELV / PELV is only permissible in areas
with equipotential bonding and in dry indoor rooms. If these conditions are not fulfilled,
other protective measures against electric shock must be applied e.g. protective insulation.
Only suitably qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only after becoming
familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and maintenance procedures
contained in this manual. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent
upon its proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance.
As the earth leakage for this product can be greater than 3.5 mA a.c., a fixed earth
connection is required and the minimum size of the protective earth conductor shall comply
with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment.
If an RCD (also referred to as an ELCB or a RCCB) is fitted, the Power Module will operate
without nuisance tripping provided that:
- A type B RCD is used.
- The trip limit of the RCD is 300 mA.
- The neutral of the supply is grounded.
- Only one Power Module is supplied from each RCD.
- The output cables are less than 15 m screened or 30 m unscreened.
The power supply, DC and motor terminals, the brake and thermistor cables can carry
dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative. Wait at least five minutes to allow the
unit to discharge after switching off the line supply before carrying out any installation work.
It is strictly prohibited for any mains disconnection to be performed on the motor-side of the
system; any disconnection of the mains must be performed on the mains-side of the
Inverter.
When connecting the line supply to the Inverter, make sure that the terminal case of the
motor is closed.
This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection according to
UL508C. Refer to P0610 and P0335, i²t is ON by default.
When changing from the ON to OFF-state of an operation if an LED or other similar display
is not lit or active; this does not indicate that the unit is switched-off or powered-down.
The inverter must always be grounded.
Isolate the line supply before making or changing connections to the unit.
Ensure that the inverter is configured for the correct supply voltage. The inverter must not
be connected to a higher voltage supply.
Static discharges on surfaces or interfaces that are not generally accessible (e.g. terminal
or connector pins) can cause malfunctions or defects. Therefore, when working with
inverters or inverter components, ESD protective measures should be observed.
Take particular notice of the general and regional installation and safety regulations
regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178) as well as the relevant
regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective equipment (PPE).
Safety Notes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 11
CAUTION
Children and the general public must be prevented from accessing or approaching the
equipment!
This equipment may only be used for the purpose specified by the manufacturer.
Unauthorized modifications and the use of spare parts and accessories that are not sold or
recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment can cause fires, electric shocks and
injuries.
NOTICE
Keep this manual within easy reach of the equipment and make it available to all users.
Whenever measuring or testing has to be performed on live equipment, the regulations of
Safety Code BGV A2 must be observed, in particular § 8 "Permissible Deviations when
Working on Live Parts". Suitable electronic tools should be used.
Before installing and commissioning, please read these safety instructions and warnings
carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning
labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels.
Safety Notes
Frequency converter
12 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 13
Product Line 3
3.1 Global System Overview
Inverter families
The function manual contains the function description of the following inverter families.
● SINAMICS G120
● SINAMICS G120D
All the inverters are modular build. That means, within a series there is a range of Control
Units that can be combined with different variants of Power Modules.
Power Modules and Control Units of different ranges must not be interchanged.
3.2 Function Overview
This section gives an overview about the available functions, depending on the type of
frequency inverters.
Common inverter functions
The Inverter provide the following functions:
● Motor Data Identification
● Motorized potentiometer
● JOG function
Product Line
3.2 Function Overview
Frequency converter
14 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
● Monitoring functions
– General monitoring functions and messages
– Load torque monitoring
– Power Module Protection
General Overload Monitoring
Power Module Thermal Monitoring
– Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses
Thermal motor model
Motor Temperature Identification after Restart
Temperature sensors
● Restart functions
– Automatic restart
– Flying restart
● Data Sets
● Electro-mechanical brake functions
– Motor Holding Brake
– Instantaneous Brake
● BICO Technology
● Setpoint channel
– Summation and modification of frequency setpoint
– Ramp-function generator
– OFF/Braking Functions
– Manual and Automatic Operation
– FFBs and Fast FFBs
– Wobble Generator
Product Line
3.2 Function Overview
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 15
● Positioning ramp down
● Control functions
– V/f Control
Voltage boost
Slip compensation
V/f resonance damping
V/f control with FCC
Current limiting (Imax controller)
– Vector Control
Vector control without speed encoder
Vector control with speed encoder
Speed controller
Speed controller (SLVC)
Closed-loop torque control
Closed-loop torque control (SLVC)
Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control
Limiting the torque setpoint
Functions only available with G120 inverters
● 2-/3-wire control
● Fixed frequencies
● PID Controller
– PID dancer roll control
– PID Motorized Potentiometer
– Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies
● Digital Input Functions
● Digital Output Functions
● Analog Input Functions
● Analog Output Functions
Product Line
3.2 Function Overview
Frequency converter
16 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Fail-safe functions
Table 3- 1 Fail-safe functions
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D
CU240S CU240S DP CU240S DP-F CU240S PN CU240D DP CU240D DP-F
STO --- --- X --- --- X
SS1 --- --- X --- --- X
SLS --- --- X --- --- X
SBC --- --- X --- --- ---
Power Module functions
Table 3- 2 Power Module relating functions
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D
PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
Closed-loop Vdc control X --- --- ---
Electronic brakes X --- --- ---
Dynamic braking via chopper resistor X --- --- ---
Dynamic braking via regenerative braking --- X X X
VDC controller X --- --- ---
Interfaces
The following table defines the realizable function sources for each device.
Table 3- 3 Control Unit communication interfaces
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D
CU240S CU240S DP CU240S DP-F CU240S PN CU240D DP CU240D DP-F
Option port
(BOP/STARTER)
via r0019
X X X X --- ---
USS on RS232
via r2032
-- X X X X X
USS on RS485
via r2036
X --- --- --- --- ---
PROFIBUS DB
via r2090
--- X X --- X X
PROFInet
via r8890
--- --- --- X --- ---
Product Line
3.2 Function Overview
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 17
Table 3- 4 Control Unit interfaces
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D
CU240S CU240S DP CU240S DP-F CU240S PN CU240D DP CU240D DP-F
MMC X X X X X X
Digital inputs 9 9 6 6 6 6
Safe Digital
inputs
--- ---- 2 --- --- ---
Digital outputs 3 3 3 3 2 2
Analog inputs 2 2 2 2 --- ---
Analog outputs 2 2 2 2 --- ---
Encoder X X X X X X
PTC/KTY X X X X --- ---
Table 3- 5 Power Module interfaces
SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G120D
PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
PTC/KTY in motor cable --- --- --- X
EM Brake 24 V X X X ---
EM Brake 180 V --- --- --- X
DC+ / DC- terminals X --- --- ---
Brake chopper X --- --- ---
Product Line
3.2 Function Overview
Frequency converter
18 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 19
Parameter Assignment/Addressing 4
4.1 Overview of Parameters
Overview of parameters
The inverter is adapted to a particular application using the corresponding parameters. This
means that each parameter is identified by a parameter number and specific attributes (e.g.
monitoring parameter, write parameter, BICO attribute, group attribute etc.). Within any one
particular inverter system, the parameter number is unique.
Parameters can be accessed using the following operator units:
● BOP
● PC-based commissioning (start-up) tool STARTER.
There are two main types of parameters; those that can be altered and those that are read-
only.
3DUDPHWHU
5HDGU
ಯQRUPDOರ
5HDGSDUDPHWHUV
ಯQRUPDOರ
:ULWH5HDGSDUDPHWHUV
%,&2RXWSXW %,&2LQWSXW
:ULWH5HDG3
Figure 4-1 Parameter types
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.2 Write parameters
Frequency converter
20 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
4.2 Write parameters
Description
Parameters which can be written into and displayed are indicated by the prefix "P".
These parameters directly influence the behavior of a function. The value of this parameter is
saved in non-volatile memory (EEPROM) as long as the appropriate option was selected
(non-volatile data save). Otherwise, these values are saved in the volatile memory (RAM) of
the processor, which are lost after power failure or power-off/power-on operations.
Examples of the standard notation used throughout our manuals is given below.
Notation examples:
P0970 parameter 970
P0748.1 parameter 748, bit 01
P0819[1] parameter 819 index 1
P0013[0 ... 19] parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
4.3 Monitoring parameters
Description
Parameters which can only be monitored are indicated by the prefix "r".
These parameters are used to display internal quantities, for example states and actual
values.
Notation examples:
r0002 monitoring parameter 2
r0052.3 monitoring parameter 52, bit 03
r0947[2] monitoring parameter 947 index 2
r0964[0 ... 4] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4)
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 21
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Overview
In the Parameter Manual, the header line of each parameter shows all the attributes and
groups for that specific parameter. The figure below shows the details for parameter P0700
and r1515.
%,&2LIH[LVW
&86'3
&86'3)
6HOFWLRQRIFRPPDQGVRXUFH&RPPDQGVRXUFHVH
6HOFWLRQRIFRPPDQGVRXUFH&RPPDQGVRXUFHVH
$FFHVVOHYHO
4XLFNFRPP12
&DQEHFKDQJHG7
0LQ
3*URXS&RPPDQGV
$FWLY<(6
8QLW
0D[
'DWDW\SH8QVLJQHG
'DWDVHW&'6
)DFWRU\VHWWLQJ
3>@
3>@
,QGH[
&830YDULDQWV
Figure 4-2 Description of attributes for parameter P0700
%,&2LIH[LVW
*
&2$GGLWLRQDOWRUTXHVHWSRLQW&2$GGWUTVHW
&2$GGLWLRQDOWRUTXHVHWSRLQW&2$GGWUTVHW
$FFHVVOHYHO 3*URXS&ORVHGORRSFRQWURO
8QLW
'DWDW\SH)ORDWLQJ3RLQW
U
U
Figure 4-3 Description of attributes for parameter r1515
Index
Using the index, a parameter (e.g. p0013[20]) is defined with several consecutive elements
(in this case, 20). Each individual index is defined using a numerical value.
When transferred to a parameter this means that an indexed parameter can have several
values. The values are addressed using the parameter number including the index value
(e.g. p0013[0], p0013[1], p0013[2], p0013[3], p0013[4], ...).
Indexed parameters are used, for example:
● Drive Data Sets (DDS)
● Command Data Sets (CDS)
● Sub functions.
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
22 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
BICO
The following types of connectable parameters are available. A description of BICO
technology is given in the section "BICO Technology".
Table 4- 1 Parameter attributes - BICO
BICO Description
BI Binector Input
BO Binector Output
CI Connector Input
CO Connector Output
CO/BO Connector Output/Binector Output
Access level
The access level is controlled using parameter P0003. In this case, only those parameters
are visible at the BOP, where the access level is less than or equal to the value assigned in
parameter P0003. On the other hand, for STARTER, only access levels 0 and 3 are relevant.
For example, parameters with access level 3 cannot be changed, if the appropriate access
level has not been set.
The following access levels are implemented in the inverters:
Table 4- 2 Parameter attributes - access level
Access level Description
0 User-defined Parameter Manual (refer to P0013)
1 Standard access to the most frequently used parameters
2 Extended access, e.g. to inverter I/O functions
3 Expert access only for experienced users
4 Service access only for authorized service personnel – with password
protection.
Note
In STARTER, all user parameters (access stage 3) are always displayed using the expert list
– independent of the setting p0003 = 0, 1, 2 or 3.
When changing parameters using STARTER, or via a higher-level control system, parameter
value changes always become immediately effective.
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 23
Can be changed
"P" parameters can only be changed depending on the inverter state. The parameter value is
not accepted if the instantaneous state is not listed in the parameter attribute "Can be
changed". For instance, the quick commissioning parameter P0010 with the attribute "CT"
can only be changed in quick commissioning "C" or ready "T" but not in operation "U".
Table 4- 3 Parameter attributes - Can be changed
State Description
C Quick commissioning
U Operation (Drive running)
T Drive ready to run
Data types
The data type of a parameter defines the maximum possible value range. Five data types
are used for the inverter. They either represent an unsigned integer value (U16, U32) or a
floating-point value (float). The value range is frequently restricted by a minimum and
maximum value (min, max) or using inverter/motor quantities.
Table 4- 4 Parameter attributes - Data types
Data type Description
U16 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 16 bits
U32 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 32 bits
I16 Signed integer 16-bit value
I32 Signed integer 32-bit value
Float A simple precise floating point value according to the IEEE standard format
max. value range: -3.39e+38 –+3.39e+38
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
24 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Unit
The values of parameters support the following units:
Table 4- 5 Parameter attributes - Unit
Unit Description Unit Description
- No dimension m/s Meters per second
% Percentage Nm Newton meter
A Ampere W Watt
V Volt kW Kilowatt
Ohm Ohm Hp Horse power
us Microseconds kWh Kilowatt hours
ms Milliseconds °C Degrees Celsius
s Seconds m Meter
Hz Hertz kg Kilograms
kHz Kilohertz ° Degrees (angular degrees)
1/min Revolutions per minute [RPM]
Grouping
The parameters are sub-divided into groups according to their functionality. This increases
the transparency and allows a quicker and more efficient search for specific parameters.
Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be used to control the specific group of parameters that
are displayed on the BOP.
Table 4- 6 Parameter attributes - Grouping
Grouping Description Main parameter area:
ALWAYS 0 all parameters
INVERTER 2 inverter parameters 0200 … 0299
MOTOR 3 motor parameters 0300 … 0399 and
0600 … 0699
ENCODER 4 speed encoder 0400 … 0499
TECH_APL 5 technical applications/units 0500 … 0599
COMMANDS 7 control commands, digital I/O 0700 … 0749 and
0800 … 0899
TERMINAL 8 Analog inputs/outputs 0750 … 0799
SETPOINT 10 Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 1000 … 1199
Safety integrated 11 Fail-safe functions 9000 … 9999
FUNC 12 Inverter functions 1200 … 1299
CONTROL 13 Motor open-loop/closed-loop control 1300 … 1799
COMM 20 Communications 2000 … 2099
ALARMS 21 Faults, warnings, monitoring functions 0947 … 2199
TECH 22 Technology controller (PID controller) 2200 … 2399
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 25
Active
This attribute is only of importance in conjunction with an BOP. The "Yes" attribute indicates
that this value is immediately accepted when it is changed. Especially parameters which are
used for optimization functions have this property (e.g. constant voltage boost P1310 or filter
time constants). On the other hand, for parameters with the attribute "First confirm", the
value is only accepted after first pressing the key . These include, for example,
parameters where the parameter value can have different settings/meanings (e.g. selecting
the frequency setpoint source P1000).
Table 4- 7 Parameter attributes - Active
Active Description
Yes The value becomes valid immediately.
First confirm The value becomes valid after pressing
Note
Parameter values that are changed using STARTER or a higher-level control do not have to
be acknowledged.
Quick commissioning
This parameter attribute identifies as to whether the parameter is included in the quick
commissioning (QC) (P0010 = 1).
Table 4- 8 Parameter attributes - Quick commissioning
QC Description
No The parameter is not included in the quick commissioning
Yes The parameter is included in the quick commissioning
Parameter Assignment/Addressing
4.4 Parameter Attributes
Frequency converter
26 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Value range
The value range, which is first specified by the data type, is restricted by minimum and
maximum values depending on the quantities of the inverter/motor. The values min and max
are permanently saved in the inverter and cannot be changed by the user. To support
commissioning each write parameter has a default value called factory setting.
Table 4- 9 Parameter attributes - Value range
Value range Description
- No value entered (e.g.: "r parameter")
Min Minimum value
Max Maximum value
Def Default value
Data sets
A detailed description for the data sets is given in the respective section
Table 4- 10 Data sets
BICO Description
CDS Command data set
DDS Drive data set
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 27
BICO Technology 5
5.1 BICO Technology Overview
Interconnecting signals (BICO)
A state-of-the-art inverter must be able to interconnect internal and external signals (setpoint
or actual values and control or status signal). This interconnection functionality must have a
high degree of flexibility in order to be able to adapt the inverter to new applications. Further,
a high degree of usability is required, which also fulfills standard applications. To fulfill these
requirements BICO technology and fast parameterization using parameters P0700/P1000
are used.
5.2 Using BICO technology
Description
Using BICO technology, process data can be freely interconnected using the "standard"
inverter parameterization.
For this all values which can be freely interconnected are defined as "Connectors" ,
e.g. frequency setpoint, frequency actual value, current actual value, etc.
All digital signals which can be freely interconnected are defined as "Binectors"
eg. status of a digital input, ON/OFF, message function when a limit is violated etc.
There are many input and output quantities as well as quantities within the closed-loop
control which can be interconnected in an inverter. It is possible to adapt the inverter to the
various requirements using BICO technology.
Binectors
A binector is a digital (binary) signal without any units, it can take the value 0 or 1. Binectors
always refer to functions and are sub-divided into binector inputs and binector outputs (see
the table below). In this case, the binector input is always designated using a "P" parameter
(e.g. P0840 BI: ON/OFF1), while the binector output is always represented using an "r"
parameter (e.g. r1025 BO: FF status).
BICO Technology
5.2 Using BICO technology
Frequency converter
28 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
As can be seen from the examples above, the binector parameters have the following
abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
BI: Binector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters)
The BI parameter can be interconnected with a binector output as a source, by entering the
parameter number of the binector output (BO parameter) as a value in the BI parameter.
BO: Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters)
The BO parameter can be used as a source for BI parameters. For a particular
interconnection the BO parameter number must be entered into the BI parameter.
Example
Combine the ON/OFF1 command with selecting a fixed frequency.
U
3
3
%,212))
%2))6WDWXV )XQFWLRQ)XQFWLRQ
Figure 5-1 Binector output (BO) ==> Binector input (BI)
When selecting a fixed frequency the fixed frequency status bit (r1025) is internally set from
0 to 1.
The source for the ON/OFF1 command is parameter P0840 (default DI0). If the fixed
frequency status bit is connected as source for P0840 (P0840 = 1025) the inverter starts with
activating a fixed frequency and stops with OFF1 with deactivating.
Binector symbols
Table 5- 1 Binector symbols
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function
BI Binector input
(signal sink)
3[[[[
%,
'DWDIORZ
)XQFWLRQ
BO Binector output
(signal source)
U[[[[
%2
'DWDIORZ
)XQFWLRQ
BICO Technology
5.2 Using BICO technology
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 29
Connectors
A connector has a value (16 or 32 bit), which can include a normalized quantity (without
dimension) as well as a quantity with associated units. Connectors always refer to functions
and are sub-divided into connector inputs and connector outputs. Essentially it is the same
as for the binectors, the connector inputs are characterized by a "P" parameter (e.g. P0771
CI: AO (analog output)); while the connector outputs are always represented using an "r"
parameter (e.g. r0021 CO: Act. frequency).
As can be seen from the examples above, connector parameters have the following
abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
CI: Connector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters)
The CI parameter can be interconnected with a connector output as a source, by entering
the parameter number of the connector output (CO parameter) as a value in the CI
parameter.
CO: Connector Output, signal source
The CO parameter can be used as source for CI parameters. For a particular
interconnection, the CO parameter number must be entered in the CI parameter.
Example
Associate parameter r0755 (Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax) with an
internal value (main frequency setpoint) to calculate internally scaled value. Thus
interconnect the CO Parameter r0755 (Scaled analog input) with CI parameter P1070 (Main
setpoint).
U
3
>@
3 >@
&,0DLQVHWSRLQW
&2$FW$,DIWHUVFDOH>K@
)XQFWLRQ )XQFWLRQ
Figure 5-2 Connector output (CO) ==> Connector input (CI)
Connector symbols
Table 5- 2 Connector symbols
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function
CI Connector input
(signal sink)
3[[[[
&,
'DWDIORZ
)XQFWLRQ
CO Connector output
(signal source)
U[[[[
&2
'DWDIORZ
)XQFWLRQ
BICO Technology
5.2 Using BICO technology
Frequency converter
30 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Connector and Binector Outputs
Further, there are "r" parameters where several binector outputs are combined in a word
(e.g. r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1). This feature reduces, on one hand, the number of
parameters and simplifies parameterization using the serial interface (data transfer). These
parameters are further characterized by the fact that they do not have any units and each bit
represents a digital (binary) signal.
As can be seen from the examples of parameters, these combined parameters have the
following abbreviation in front of the parameter names:
CO/BO: Connector Output/Binector Output, signal source ("r")
CO/BO parameters can be used as a source for CI parameters and BI parameters:
● In order to interconnect all of the CO/BO parameters, the parameter number must be
entered into the appropriate CI parameter (e.g. P2016[0] = 52).
● When interconnecting a single digital signal, in addition to the CO/BO parameter number,
the bit number must also be entered into the CI parameter (e.g. P0731 = 52.3)
Example
U
U
3
3
3
3
&,3='WR&%
%,)XQFWLRQWRGLJLWDORXWSXW
&2%2$FWVWDWXVZRUG
)XQFWLRQ
)XQFWLRQ
)XQFWLRQ
Figure 5-3 Connector output/Binector output (CO/BO)
Connector and Binector Output symbols
Table 5- 3 Connector and binector output symbols
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function
CO
BO
Binector/connector output
(signal source)
U[[[[
&2%2
'DWDIORZ
)XQFWLRQ
In order to interconnect two signals, a BICO setting parameter (signal sink) must be
assigned to the required BICO monitoring parameter (signal source).
Note
BICO parameters of the type CO, BO or CO/BO can be multiple used.
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 31
Common Inverter Functions 6
6.1 Motor Data Identification
Description
The Inverter has a measuring technique which is used to determine the motor parameters:
Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD) ➙ P1900 = 2
Measures Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD)
+ Magnetizing characteristic (includes
P1900 = 2)
➙ P1900 = 3
For control-related reasons, it is essential that the motor data identification is performed.
Without performing the motor data identification it is only possible to estimate ECD data
using information from the motor rating plate. For example, the stator resistance is extremely
important for the stability of the closed-loop Vector control and for the voltage boost of the V/f
characteristic. The motor data identification routine should be executed, especially if long
feeder cables or if third-party motors are being used.
If the motor data identification routine is being started for the first time, then the following
data is determined, starting from the rating plate data (rated [nominal] data) with P1900 = 2:
● ECD data
● Motor cable resistance
● IGBT on-state voltage and compensation of IGBT gating dead times.
Common Inverter Functions
6.1 Motor Data Identification
Frequency converter
32 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The rating plate data represents the initialization values for the identification. This is the
reason that it is necessary to have the correct input from the rating plate data when
determining the data specified above.
/
˰6
/
˰5
/
0
5
5
&
FDEOH
5
FDEOH
5
V
2QVWDWHYROWDJH
>9@
3
*DWLQJGHDGWLPH
>XV@
3
0DLQLQGXFWDQFH
3'
6WDWRUUHV
>˖@
3'
6WDWRUOHDNLQGXFW
3'
5RWRUOHDNLQGXFW
3'
5RWRUUHVLVWDQFH
>˖@
3'
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH
>˖@
3'
,QYHUWHU &DEOH 0RWRU
Figure 6-1 Equivalent circuit diagram (ECD)
In addition to the ECD data, the motor magnetizing characteristic (see the figure above) can
be determined using the motor data identification (P1900 = 3). If the motor-inverter
combination is operated in the field-weakening range (which is above the nominal frequency
of the motor), then this characteristic should be determined, especially when Vector control
is being used. As a result of this magnetizing characteristic, the Inverter can, in the field-
weakening range, accurately calculate the current which is generated in the field and in-turn
achieve a higher torque accuracy.
3 3 3 3 L
w
>@
3
3
3
3
˓>@
U
>$@L
>@L
w
w
Figure 6-2 Magnetizing characteristic
The motor data identification is carried-out with the motor at a standstill and it takes,
including the data calculation per selection (P1900 = 2 or 3), between 20 seconds and 4
minutes to complete, depending on the motor size. While the motor data identification is
active A0541 is displayed.
Common Inverter Functions
6.1 Motor Data Identification
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 33
The motor data identification routine must be carried-out with the motor in the cold condition
so that the motor resistance values saved can be assigned to the parameter of the ambient
temperature P0625. Only then is the correct temperature adaptation of the resistances
possible during operation.
The motor data identification routine operates with the results of the "Complete
parameterization" P0340 = 1 or the motor equivalent diagram data which was last saved.
The results become increasingly better the more times that the identification routine is
executed (up to 3 times).
WARNING
It is not permissible to carry-out the motor identification routine for loads which are
potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before starting the
motor data identification routine, the potentially hazardous load must be secured (e.g. by
lowering the load to the floor or clamping the load using the motor holding brake).
When starting the motor data identification routine, the rotor can move into a preferred
position. This is more significant for larger motors.
Note
The equivalent circuit data (P0350, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360) and the motor cable
resistance (P0352) have to be entered as phase values.
It is recommended that the resistance of the motor supply cable (p0352) is entered before
starting the standstill measurement (p1900) so it can be included when the stator resistance
(p0350) is calculated.
Entering the cable resistance improves the accuracy of thermal resistance adaptation,
particularly when long supply cables are used. This governs behavior at low speeds,
particularly during sensorless vector control.
It is not necessary to lock the motor rotor for the motor data identification routine but if
possible it should be done, e.g. by closing the motor holding brake.
Before starting the motor identification, the correct ambient temperature value should be
entered in P0625 (default 20 °C).
The following formula can be applied to check the correctness of the motor rating plate data:
PN = √3 ∗ VNΥ ∗ INΥ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η ≈ √3 ∗ VNΔ ∗ INΔ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η
Where:
PN rated motor power
VN Υ, VN Δ rated motor voltage (star/delta)
IN Υ, IN Δ rated motor current (star/delta)
cosϕ power factor
η efficiency
If problems occur while the motor data identification is active, e.g. the current controller
oscillates, the rating plate data should be re-checked and an approximately correct
magnetizing current entered in P0320. The motor data identification routine should then be
re-started by calling P1900 = 2 or P1900 = 3.
A step-by-step description is given in section "Quick Commissioning".
Common Inverter Functions
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Frequency converter
34 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Data
Parameter range: P1031 … r1050
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP3100
Description - Operation
The motorized potentiometer (MOP) function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer
to enter setpoints. The MOP value, adjusted using the "MOP UP" (P1035) and
"MOP DOWN" (P1036) command is stored in r1050 and can be connected as main or
additional setpoint.
The MOP functionality can be selected using digital inputs, operator panel, or a
communication interface.
The behavior of the MOP also depends on the duration of the "MOP UP" (P1035) and
"MOP DOWN" (P1036) command:
● P1035 / P1036 (MOP UP / MOP DOWN) = 1 for < 1 s:
Frequency changes in steps of 0.1 Hz.
● P1035 / P1036 (MOP UP / MOP DOWN) = 1 for > 1 s:
Frequency ramps up (down) with the time of P1047 (P1048) but not faster than 2 s.
Table 6- 1 Overview of MOP behavior
Motorized potentiometer
MOP UP MOP DOWN
Function
0 0 Setpoint frozen
0 1 decrease setpoint
1 0 increase setpoint
1 1 Setpoint frozen
Common Inverter Functions
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 35
352),%86
U
352),QHW
U
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
U
3
3
W
W
W
W
I
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
U[
%2367$57(5
U
866RQ56
U
866RQ56
U
I
DFW
Figure 6-3 Details of MOP behavior
Input values
Table 6- 2 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1035 = … MOP UP
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs), 19.13 (BOP, default), 2032.13 (USS on RS232),
2036.13 (USS on RS485), 2091.13 (PROFIBUS DP) r8890.13 (PROFInet)
P1036 = … MOP DOWN
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs), 19.14 (BOP, default), 2032.14 (USS on RS232),
2036.14 (USS on RS485), 2091.14 (PROFIBUS DP) r8890.14 (PROFInet)
P1041 = … Select MOP setpoint source,
0 = manual (default): MOP setpoint via P1035 and P1036,
1 = automatic (MOP setpoint via P1042)
P1042 = … MOP auto setpoint
Setpoint from automatic motorized potentiometer (selected via P1041) (default = 0).
P1043 = … MOP accept ramp generator setpoint
A positive edge via this parameter sets the setpoint source for MOP signal to P1044.
0 = inactive (default )
1 = active
P1044 = … MOP ramp generator setpoint
MOP setpoint activated via a positive edge on P1043. That value becomes active immediately
at the MOP output without the ramp up time set in P1047, default = 0.
Common Inverter Functions
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Frequency converter
36 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table 6- 3 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1031 = … MOP mode
0: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active (default).
1: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active.
2: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional no ON command.
3: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040,
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional no ON command.
P1032 = … Inhibit reverse direction of MOP
0: setpoint inversion allowed (default)
1: setpoint inversion inhibited
P1040 = … Setpoint of the MOP
-650 … 650 Hz: Determines MOP setpoint (default = 5 Hz)
P1047 = … MOP ramp-up time
0 … 1000 s: Sets the ramp up time from standstill up to maximum motor frequency for the
MOP ramp generator (default = 10 s).
P1048 = … MOP ramp-down time
0 … 1000 s: Sets the ramp down time from maximum motor frequency down to standstill for
the MOP ramp generator (default = 10 s).
Output value
r1045 MOP ramp generator input frequency
input frequency of ramp generator
r1050 Actual Output frequency of the MOP
Additional parameters regarding the MOP function
Parameter Description Setting
P1080 = … Min. frequency
0 (default) … 650 Hz: Lower limit of the motor frequency, irrespective of frequency setpoint.
P1082 = … Max. frequency
0 … 650 Hz, (50 Hz default): Upper limit of the motor frequency, irrespective of the frequency
setpoint.
Common Inverter Functions
6.2 Motorized Potentiometer (MOP)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 37
Examples
Table 6- 4 MOP setpoint sources
Source
Function
BOP Serial Interface, e.g PROFIBUS Digitial inputs
P1035 (MOP UP)
P1036 (MOP DOWN)
= 19.13
= 19.14
= 2090.13
= 2090.14
= 722.4 (DI4)
= 722.5 (DI5)
Table 6- 5 MOP setpoint as main setpoint or additional setpoint
Function Source
P1070 (Main setpoint)
P1075 (Additional setpoint)
= r1050 (Output freq MOP)
Common Inverter Functions
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down
Frequency converter
38 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down
Data
Parameter range: P2480 … r2489
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The positioning ramp down can be used for applications where it is necessary that a residual
distance is moved-through up to the stop dependent on an external event (e.g. BERO
switch). In this case, the inverter generates a continuous braking ramp by selecting OFF1
depending on the actual load speed and velocity. The motor will ramp down along this
calculated braking ramp to cover the parameterised distance (see figure below).
I
W
W
3
V 3 ವI
2))
ವW
3
0RWRU *HDU
2))
I
2))
Figure 6-4 Positioning ramp down
Common Inverter Functions
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 39
To parameterize the position ramp down, enter the remaining distance that must be run
through in P2488, referring to the load. In order to carry-out the residual distance calculation
on the load side, the mechanical arrangement of the axis (gearbox ratio, linear or rotary axis)
must be appropriately parameterized (see figure below).
L
L
L
V
OLQ
V
URW
Q
0RWRU
Q
0RWRU
Q
/RDG
Q
/RDG
L
3
3
3
3
3
]
'LVSRVLWLRQ
0RWRU *HDU
0RWRU *HDU
/RDG
/RDG
3DUDPHWHU
>XQLW@
1RRIUHYROXWLRQV
0RWRUUHYROXWLRQV
/RDGUHYROXWLRQV
0RWRUUHYROXWLRQV
/RDGUHYROXWLRQV
] VFUHZOHDG
Figure 6-5 Rotary or linear axis
Using this data, the frequency inverter calculates the ratio between the distance and the
motor revolutions and can therefore consider the movement on the load side.
Note
The "Switch-off frequency" (P2167) can have an influence on the final positioning result.
Common Inverter Functions
6.3 Positioning Ramp Down
Frequency converter
40 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Table 6- 6 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2480 = … Enable positioning ramp down manually
Defines the source signal for enabling/disabling positioning
P2481 = … Gearbox ratio input
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Defines ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox
input shaft
P2482 = … Gearbox ratio output
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Defines ratio between number of motor shaft revolutions to equal one revolution of the gearbox
output shaft
P2484 = … No. of shaft turns = 1 Unit
0.01 ... 9999.99, default 1.00
Sets the number of rotations of the motor shaft required to represent 1 unit of user selected
unit
P2487 = … Positional error trim value
-99 ... 200, default 0
Offset error corretion due to mechanical error
P2488 = … Distance / No. of revolutions
0.01 ... 9999.99, Number of units (P2484) for down ramp (default = 1.00)
Sets the required distance or number of revolutions
Output value
r2489 Tracking Values
Index:
1: Remaining number of shaft revolutions
2: Accumulated shaft revolutions during the positioning ramp down
3: Accumulated encoder increments during the positioning ramp down
Common Inverter Functions
6.4 JOG
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 41
6.4 JOG
Data
Parameter range: P1055 … P1061
Warnings: A0923
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP5000
Description
The JOG function allows:
● to check the functionality of the motor and inverter after commissioning has been
completed (first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.)
● to bring a motor or a motor load into a specific position
● to traverse a motor, e.g. after a program has been interrupted
The JOG function has the commands "Jog enable", "Jog right" and JOG left". It can be
performed via digital inputs, BOP or serial interface.
Table 6- 7 Overview of Jog function
JOG enable JOG right JOG left
0 0/1 0/1 No reaction
1 0 1 Inverter accelerates to JOG frequency left (P1059)
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to JOG frequency right
(P1058)
1 1 1 Frequency frozen at the current value with alarm
A0293
Common Inverter Functions
6.4 JOG
Frequency converter
42 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
I
ಯರ
ಯರ
ಯರ
ಯರ
$ $
W
W
W
',
%23
56
56
-2*ULJKW
-2*OHIW
3 ಯರ
ಯರ
W
-2*HQDEOH
)LHOGEXV
Figure 6-6 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise
Pressing the appropriate key accelerates the motor to the frequency in P1058 (JOG right) or
P1059 (JOG left) at the ramp rate set in P1060. When the key is released, the motor stops,
decelerating at the rate set in P1061. If JOG right and JOG left signals are given at the same
time, there is no reaction, and a warning A0923 is raised.
Input values
Table 6- 8 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1055 = … Enable JOG right
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.8 (option port) / r2090.8 (serial interface)
P1056 = … Enable JOG left
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.9 (option port) / r2090.9 (serial interface)
P1057 = … JOG enable
0 disabled, 1 enabled (default)
Common Inverter Functions
6.4 JOG
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 43
Table 6- 9 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1058 = … JOG frequency right
0 Hz … 650 Hz, default 5 Hz.
P1059 = … JOG frequency left
0 Hz … 650 Hz, default 5 Hz.
P1060 = … JOG ramp-up time
0 s ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1061 = … JOG ramp-down time
0 s ... 650 s, default 10 s
Example
JOG function via option port (BOP)
Command source via PROFIBUS communication
P1055 = 2090.8 JOG right via PROFIBUS
P1056 = 2090.9 JOG left via PROFIBUS
Note
The JOG function as used in the described inverter does not correspond to the definition in
the PROFIdrive profile.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
44 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.5 Monitoring Functions
6.5.1 General monitoring functions and messages
Data
P2150 … P2180 Parameter range:
r0052, r0053, r2197, r2198
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP4100, FP4110
Description
The described inverter has an extensive range of monitoring functions and messages which
can be used for open-loop process control. The control can either be implemented in the
inverter or using an external control (e.g. PLC). The interlocking functions in the inverter as
well as the output of signals for external control are implemented using BICO technology.
The status of the individual monitoring functions and messages are emulated in the following
CO/BO parameters:
r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word
r0050 CO/BO: Active command data set
r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Control word 1
r0055 CO/BO: Supplementary (additional) control word
r0056 CO/BO: Status word – closed-loop motor control
r0403 CO/BO: Encoder status word
r0722 CO/BO: Status, digital inputs
r0747 CO/BO: Status, digital outputs
r1407 CO/BO: Status 2 – closed-loop motor control
r2197 CO/BO: Messages 1
r2198 CO/BO: Messages 2
r9722 CO/BO: SI status word (only available with Fail-safe CUs)
Frequently used monitoring functions/messages including parameter number and bit are
shown in the table below.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 45
Table 6- 10 Extract of monitoring functions and messages
Functions/states Parameter/bit number Function chart
Inverter ready 52.0 -
Inverter ready to run 52.1 -
Inverter running 52.2 -
Inverter fault active 52.3 -
OFF2 active 52.4 -
OFF3 active 52.5 -
On inhibit active 52.6 -
Inverter warning active 52.7 -
Deviation setpoint – actual value 52.8 -
PZD control 52.9 -
|f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) 52.10 / 2197.6 FP4110
Warning: Motor current limit 52.11 -
Brake active 52.12 -
Motor overload 52.13 -
Motor runs right 52.14 -
Inverter overload 52.15 -
DC brake active 53.0 -
|f_act| > P2167 (f_off) 53.1 FP4110
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min) 53.2 FP4100
i_act ≧ P2170 53.3 / 2197.8 FP4110
f_act > P2155 (f_1) 53.4 / 2197.2 FP4100
f_act ≦ P2155 (f_1) 53.5 / 2197.1 FP4100
f_act >= setpoint (f_set) 53.6 / 2197.4 -
Vdc_act < P2172 53.7 / 2197.9 FP4110
Vdc_act > P2172 53.8 / 2197.10 FP4110
Ramping finished 53.9 -
PID output R2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 53.10 FP5100
PID output R2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 53.11 FP5100
|f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) 2197.0 FP4100
f_act > zero 2197.3 FP4110
|f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) 2197.5 FP4110
f_act == setpoint (f_set) 2197.7 FP4110
No-load operation 2197.11 -
|f_act| <= P2157 (f_2) 2198.0 -
|f_act| > P2157 (f_2) 2198.1 -
|f_act| <= P2159 (f_3) 2198.2 -
|f_act| > P2159 (f_3) 2198.3 -
|f_set| < P2161 (f_min_set) 2198.4 -
f_set > 0 2198.5 -
Motor blocked 2198.6 -
Motor stalled 2198.7 -
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
46 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Functions/states Parameter/bit number Function chart
|i_act r0068| < P2170 2198.8 FP4100
|m_act| > P2174 & setpoint reached 2198.9 -
|m_act| > P2174 2198.10 -
Load torque monitoring: Warning 2198.11 -
Load torque monitoring: Fault 2198.12 -
Table 6- 11 Messages of SI status word (only available with Fail-safe CUs)
Functions/states Parameter/bit number Function chart
Safe torque off (STO) selected r9772.0
Safe torque off (STO) activated r9772.1
Safe stop 1 (SS1) selected r9772.2
Safety monitoring ramp active r9772.3
Safely limited speed (SLS) selected r9772.4
SLS limit reached r9772.5
Passivated STO active, drive fault r9772.8
Safe Brake closed r9772.14
Dynamisation required r9772.15
Note
On the BOP the bit numbers are displayed in hex-format (0..9, A..F).
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 47
6.5.2 Load torque monitoring
Data
P2181 … P2192 Parameter range:
r2198
Warnings: A0952
Faults: F0452
Function chart number: –
Description
This function allows the mechanical force transmission
between motor and motor load to be monitored. Typical
applications include, for example pulley belts, flat belts
or chains, or pulleys for toothed wheels of motor shafts
which then transmit circumferential velocities and
circumferential forces (see figure).
'ULYH
VKDIW
'HIOHFWLRQ
UROO
Shaft drive with flat belts
The load torque monitoring function can detect whether the motor load is locked or the force
transmission has been interrupted.
For the load torque monitoring function, the actual frequency/torque characteristic is
compared with the programmed frequency/torque characteristic (refer to P2182 … P2190). If
the actual value lies outside the programmed tolerance bandwidth, then, depending on
parameter P2181, either warning A0952 or fault F0452 is generated. Parameter P2192 can
be used to delay the output of the warning or fault message. This avoids erroneous alarms
which could be caused by brief transient states (see figure below).
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
48 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
3
3
3
3
3
3 3 3
W
$
3
3
3
%LW
3
3
7RUTXH>1P@
$FWXDO
WRUTXH
)UHTXHQF\
>+]@
Figure 6-7 Load torque monitoring (P2181 = 1)
The frequency/torque tolerance bandwidth is defined by the gray shaded area in the figure
below. The bandwidth is determined by the frequency values P2182 … P2184 including the
max. frequency P1082 and the torque limits P2186 … P2189. When defining the tolerance
bandwidth it should be ensured that a specific tolerance is taken into account in which the
torque values are allows to vary corresponding to the application.
3
8SSHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
/RZHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
8SSHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
/RZHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
8SSHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
/RZHUWRUTXHWKUHVKROG
3
7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\
7RUTXH>1P@ 3
0D[IUHTXHQF\
3
7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\ 3
7KUHVKROGIUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
>+]@
Figure 6-8 Frequency and torque tolerance bandwidth
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 49
6.5.3 Power Module Protection
6.5.3.1 General Overload Monitoring
Data
Parameter range: P0640, r0067, r1242, P0210
Warnings: A0501, A0502, A0503
Faults: F0001, F0002, F0003, F0020
Function chart number: -
Description
Just the same as for motor protection, the inverter provides extensive protection for the
power components. This protection concept is sub-divided into two levels:
● Warning and response
● Fault and shutdown
Using this concept, a high utilization of the Power Module components can be achieved
without the inverter being immediately shut down.
The monitoring thresholds for the faults and shutdowns are permanently saved in the
inverter and cannot be changed by the user. On the other hand, the threshold levels for
"Warning and response" can be modified by the user to optimize the system. These values
have default settings so that the "Fault and shutdown" thresholds do not respond.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
50 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.5.3.2 Power Module Thermal Monitoring
Data
P0290 … P0294 Parameter range:
r0036 … r0037
Warnings: A0504 … A0506
Faults: F0004 … F0006, F0012, F0022
Function chart number: -
Description
Similar to motor protection, the main function of the thermal power module monitoring is to
detect critical states. Parametrizable responses are provided for the user which allows the
motor system to still be operated at the power limit avoiding immediate shutdown. However,
the possibility of assigning parameters only involves interventions below the shutdown
threshold which cannot be changed by users.
The described inverter has the following thermal monitoring functions:
● i2t monitoring
The i2t monitoring is used to protect components which have a long thermal time constant
in comparison to the semiconductors. An overload with reference to i2t is present if the
inverter utilization r0036 indicates a value greater than 100% (utilization as a % refers to
rated operation).
● Heatsink temperature
The heatsink temperature of the power semiconductors (IGBT) is monitored and
displayed in r0037[0].
● Chip temperature
Significant temperature differences can occur between the junction of the IGBT and the
heatsink. These differences are taken into account by the chip temperature monitoring
and are displayed in r0037[1].
When an overload occurs regarding one of these three monitoring functions, initially, a
warning is output. The warning threshold P0294 (i2t monitoring) and P0292 (heatsink
temperature and chip temperature monitoring) can be parameterized relative to the
shutdown values.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 51
Example
At the same time that the warning is output, the parameterized responses are initiated using
P0290 (default: P0290 = 2). Possible responses include:
● Reducing the pulse frequency (P0290 = 2 or 3)
This is an extremely effective method to reduce losses in the power module, as the
switching losses represent a very high proportion of the overall losses. In many
applications, a temporary reduction of the pulse frequency can be tolerated in favor of
maintaining the process
Disadvantage
The current ripple is increased when the pulse frequency is reduced. This can result in an
increase of the torque ripple at the motor shaft (for low moments of inertia) and an increase
in the noise level. When the pulse frequency is reduced this has no influence on the dynamic
response of the current control loop as the current control sampling time remains constant!
● Reducing the output frequency (P0290 = 0 or 2)
This is advantageous if it is not desirable to reduce the pulse frequency or if the pulse
frequency is already set to the lowest level. Further, the load should have a characteristic
similar to that of a fan, e.g. a square-law torque characteristic for decreasing speed.
When the output frequency is reduced, this significantly reduces the inverter output
current and in turn reduces the losses in the power module.
● No reduction (P0290 = 1)
This option should be selected if neither a reduction in the pulse frequency nor a
reduction in the output current is being considered. In this case, the inverter does not
change its operating point after the warning threshold has been exceeded so that the
motor can continue to be operated until the shutdown values are reached. After the
shutdown threshold has been reached, the inverter shuts down (trips) with fault F0004.
The time which expires up to shutdown is however not defined and depends on the
magnitude of the overload. Only the warning threshold can be changed in order to obtain
an earlier warning and, if required, externally intervene in the motor process (e.g. by
reducing the load, lowering the ambient temperature).
Note
If the inverter fan fails, this would be indirectly detected by the measurement of the
heatsink temperature.
A wire breakage or short circuit of the temperature sensor(s) is also monitored.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
52 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.5.4 Thermal Motor Protection and Overload Responses
Data
P0335, P0601 … P0640
P0344
P0350 … P0360
Parameter range:
r0035
Warnings: A0511
Faults: F0011, F0015
Function chart number: –
Description
The thermal motor protection defends the motor effectively against overheating and ensures
high motor utilization even if the motor operates at its thermal limits. It can be used with or
without a temperature sensor.
Thermal motor protection can be realized using one of the following variants:
● using the thermal motor model without sensor (P0601 = 0)
● using a PTC thermistor (P0601 = 1)
● using a KTY84 sensor (P0601 = 2)
● using a ThermoClick sensor (P0601 = 4)
When the motor is operated at its rated speed and the motor temperature will be calculated
after power on (P0621 = 1/2) thermal protection without sensor can be used.
When the motor is operated below its rated speed or if the motor temperature is not
calculated after power on (P0621 = 0), one of the above mentioned temperature sensors
should be used.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 53
U
%LW
U
U
U
9
7
V
37&
.7<
3
3
U
ุ
3
3 9
˽
)DXOW
)
$'&
37&
.7<
6LJQDO
ORVV
GHWHFWLRQ
(TXLYDOHQWFLUXLWGDWD
3RZHUGLVVLSDWLRQ3YPRW
7KHUPDO
PRWRU
PRGHO
1RVHQVRU
7KHUPR&OLFN
0RWRU
LW
WHPS
UHDFWLRQ
Figure 6-9 Thermal motor protection
Features of thermal motor protection
Common Features
● Motor protection independent from inverter protection
● Separate calculation of the motor temperature for each data set
● Selectable overtemperature reaction via P0610.
Features of thermal motor protection without sensor
● Motor temperature calculation using the thermal motor model
● Adjustable temperature warning threshold (default: P0604 = 130 °C)
● Adjustable trip threshold (P0604 * 1.1)
Features of thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor
● Measured trip threshold instead of calculated threshold
Features of thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor
● Improved protection by evaluation of the KTY84 sensor (advantage: having precise initial
temperature after a line supply failure)
● Adjustable temperature warning threshold (default: P0604 = 130 °C)
● Adjustable trip threshold (P0604 * 1.1)
Features of thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor
● Measured trip threshold instead of calculated threshold
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
54 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameters to establish thermal motor protection
Table 6- 12 Main parameters for thermal motor protection
Parameter Description Setting
P0601 = … Motor temperature sensor
0: No sensor (default); 1: PTC thermistor; 2: KTY84; 4: ThermoClick sensor
P0604 = … Threshold motor temperature (0° C … 200°C, default: 130 °C)
Warning threshold for motor temperature protection. The trip temperature is 10 % higher as the
value in P0604. If the actual motor temperature exeeds the trip temperature, the inverter reacts
as defined in P0610.
This settings are not effective with a PTC thermistor or a ThermoClick sensor
P0610 = … Motor I2t temperature reaction
0: No reaction, warning only; 1: Warning and Imax reduction (result: reduced frequency and trip
with F0011);
2: Warning and trip (F0011) (default)
P0621 = … Motor temp. ident after restart (0: No identification ; 1: Temperature identification only after
power on; 2 : Temperature identification after every power on( default)
P0625 = … Ambient motor temperature (-40 °C … 80 °C, default: 20 °C)
Ambient temperature of motor at motor data identification. Only change when motor is cold.
After changing Motor Identification has to be performed.
Table 6- 13 Additional parameters
Parameter Description Setting
r0035 Act. motor temperature
p0344 Motor weight (1 kg … 6500 kg, default: 9,4 kg)
Used in thermal motor model. Normally calculated via P0340, can be changed manually.
P0622 = … Magnetizing time for temp id after start up (0 ms … 2000 ms, default: 0 ms)
Magnetization time for stator resistance identification.
p0640 = … Motor overload factor
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 55
6.5.4.1 Thermal motor protection without sensor
Description
If the motor temperature without sensor is selected (P0601 = 0), the motor data and ambient
temperature, entered during quick commissioning are used to calculate the motor
temperature according a build in thermal motor model. This procedure permits reliable and
stable operation for standard Siemens motors. For motors from third-party manufacturers it
is possible that the calculation can be optimized by adapting the motor weight (P0344).
The trip threshold can be changed via the warning threshold (P0604, default 130 °C,
according thermal class B), where the following applies: Trip threshold = P0604 * 1.1.
If the trip threshold is reached the inverter reacts according the setting of P0610.
Additional information about temperature rise classes
In motor technology, temperature rise issues play a
decisive role when dimensioning electrical machinery.
Different temperature limits apply for the various
materials used in electric motors. Depending on the
insulating material being used, a differentiation is made
according to thermal classes (refer to the motor rating
plate) with defined limit temperatures. An excerpt from
IEC85 is provided in the table.
Extract from IEC85 thermal classes:
7KHUPDO
FODVV
0D[SHUPLVVLEOH
WHPSHUDWXUH
<
$
(
%
)
+
r&
r&
r&
r&
r&
r&
Motor temperature calculation using the thermal motor model
The temperature calculation uses a thermal motor model to calculate the temperatures of
various locations in the motor.
Note
To get precise values we always recommend to perform a Motor Data Identification after
Quick Commissioning so that the electrical equivalent circuit diagram data are determined.
This allows a calculation of the losses which occur in the motor which have an impact on the
accuracy of the thermal motor model.
The motor temperature calculation is used for each variant of thermal motor protection
except using a KTY84 sensor. In this case the values given by the KTY84 sensor are used
independent of the P0621settings.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
56 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The calculation can be adjusted using P0621 as follows:
● P0621 = 0: No calculation. The value of P0625 (Ambient Motor Temperature) will be
used.
● P0621 = 1: The motor temperature will be calculated the first time the motor starts after
the power supply has been switched on.
● P0621 = 2: The motor temperature will be calculated each time the motor starts.
Temperature calculating procedure
After power supply is available and a motor ON command is issued, the motor will be
magnetized first. If "Motor temperature calculation" is deactivated (P0621 = 0), the motor
immediately starts to rotate. If it is activated (P0621 = 1/2), the system waits until
magnetization has been completed and until the motor current remains constant over one
period (P0622). If it is constant the value is taken to calculate the winding resistance. This is
then entered in r0623.
If the motor is cold, the value of r0623 must approximately correspond to the value of P0350;
it must be appropriately higher if the motor is not cold. (at 130 °C approximately 150 %).
Note
In the following cases, the motor temperature cannot be calculated and an average
temperature of aproximately 47 °C will be used for calculation:
V/f operation
Fault when measuring the current, e.g. the current isn’t sufficiently constant
Due to a flying restart the speed is too high.
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 57
6.5.4.2 Thermal motor protection with a PTC thermistor
Description
The PTC is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of
the inverter.
PTC monitoring is activated with the parameter setting
P0601 = 1. If the resistance value, connected at the
terminals, exceeds 1500 Ω the inverter reacts according the
setting of P0610.
If the PTC thermistor recognizes a sensor wire breakage
(> 2000 Ω) or a short-circuit (< 10 Ω), the inverter trips with
F0015.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
10 50 100 150 200 250
737&
537&
6.5.4.3 Thermal motor protection with a KTY84 sensor
Description
WARNING
The KTY84 temperature sensor is polarized. Therefore KTY+ must be connected to
terminal 14 and KTY- to terminal 15 of the frequency inverter.
Otherwise the thermal motor protection does not work well. This can lead to extremely
dangerous overheating of the motor without tripping with F0011 to prevent the motor from
burning.
If the motor temperature monitoring with KTY84 is
activated (P0601 = 2), the sensor temperature is written
into parameter r0035 instead of the value, calculated by
the motor model.
The trip threshold can be changed via the warning
threshold (P0604, default 130 °C), where the following
applies:
Trip threshold = P0604 * 1.1.
If the trip threshold is reached the inverter reacts
according the setting of P0610.
If the KTY84 sensor recognizes a sensor wire breakage
or a short-circuit, the inverter trips with F0015.
5
.7<
NΩ
7
.7<
Common Inverter Functions
6.5 Monitoring Functions
Frequency converter
58 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.5.4.4 Thermal motor protection with a ThermoClick sensor
Using a ThermoClick sensor (P0601 = 4)
The thermoClick sensor is connected to the control terminals 14 and 15 of the inverter.
ThermoClick sensor monitoring is activated with the parameter setting P0601 = 4. If the
switching threshold of the thermoClick sensor is reached, the inverter reacts according the
settings in P0610.
With a thermoClick sensor a short circuit will not be detected. A wire breakage will be
identified as motor overtemperature and the inverter reacts according the setting in P0610.
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 59
6.6 Restart Functions
6.6.1 Automatic restart
Data
Parameter range: P1210, P1211
Faults: F0003, F0035
Function chart number: -
Description
The "automatic restart" function allows the inverter, to quit faults automatically and start
again, without a new run command on the next power up.
The "automatic restart" function requires a RUN command, both prior to the power failure
and on power up, to operate.
The automatic restart function has to be parametrized via P1210 (Automatic restart behavior)
and P1211 (number or restart attempts). The restart attempts can be set from 0 … 10
(default = 3). The number is internally decremented after each unsuccessful attempt. After all
attempts have been made automatic restart is cancelled with the message F0035. After a
successful start attempt, the counter is again reset to the initial value.
Note
The automatic restart function should not be used when the inverter is conected via a
fieldbus system to a higher level control system. If, in this case, a line undervoltage or a line
supply failure occurs we recommend to switch the inverter off and on again if the line supply
is available again.
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
60 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
CAUTION
*) Automatic restart with external 24 V supply
If the Control Unit is powered by an external 24 V supply and the line supply fails, the
Power Module will lose power, but the Control Unit will remain active. If this situation
occurs, the Control Unit will not perform an automatic restart. This situation could result in
the inverter being in an undetermined state and may not react as predicted.
Command source for automatic restart
The automatic restart function has been designed to ignore command source time-outs.
That is, if the command source is, for example, a PLC and the PLC times-out an automatic
restart will not be initiated.
On power failures (line supply failure), a differentiation is made between the following
conditions:
● Line undervoltage
"Line undervoltage" is an extremely short supply interruption. A BOP e.g. - if installed -
hasn't gone dark. The LED SF will not be on due to a line undervoltage.
● Line supply failure
A "Line supply failure" represents a longer line supply interruption. If, in case of a line
supply failure, the line supply returns the LED SF will be on.
Table 6- 14 Overview of Automatic restart function
Automatic Restart
(P1210)
Number of restart
attempts (P1211)
0 disabled --
1 disabled Trip reset after power on
2 disabled Restart after line supply failure
3 enabled Restart after line supply failure/undervoltage or fault
4 disabled Restart after line undervoltage
5 disabled Restart after line supply failure and fault
6 enabled Restart after line supply failure/undervoltage or fault
Note
In case of using a BOP, a pending Automatic Restart is displayed via .
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 61
The automatic restart function P1210 is shown in the table below as a function of external
states/events.
Table 6- 15 Overview of Automatic restart behavior
ON always active Inverter ON and no RUN command
Fault F0003 for All other faults for
P121
0
Line supply
failure
Line
undervoltage
Line supply
failure
Line
undervoltage
All faults + F0003
for line supply
failure
No line supply
failure
0
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1
)DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ
)DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ
)DXOWDFN
1RDFWLRQ
2
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
VHH&DXWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
5HVWDUW
3
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
4
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
5
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
VHH&DXWLRQ
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
1RDFWLRQ
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
5HVWDUW
6
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
)DXOWDFN
UHVWDUW
5HVWDUW
WARNING
When the automatic restart function is activated and line supply failure lasts for a period of
e.g. 5 s or longer it may be assumed that the inverter is powered-down. However, when the
line supply returns, the inverter can automatically start to run again without any operator
intervention.
If the operating range of the motor is entered in this status, this can result in death, severe
injury or material damage.
Note
In addition the "Flying restart" function must be activated if, for an automatic restart, the
inverter is to be connected to a motor which may already be spinning.
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
62 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.6.2 Flying restart
Data
P1200, P1202, P1203 Parameter range:
r1204, r1205
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The "Flying restart" function, enabled through P1200, allows the inverter to be switched to a
spinning motor. Whereas with high possibility a fault with overcurrent F0001 would occur by
not using this function, as the flux must first be established in the motor and the V/f control or
closed-loop Vector control must be set corresponding to the actual motor speed. The inverter
frequency is synchronized with the motor frequency using the flying restart function.
When the inverter is normally powered-up it is assumed that the motor is stationary, the
inverter accelerates it from a standstill and the speed is ramped-up to the entered setpoint.
However, in many cases these conditions are not fulfilled, e.g. a fan motor - when the
inverter is powered-down the air flowing through the fan can cause it to rotate in any
direction.
WARNING
Drive starts automatically
Keep everybody informed after enabling this function. The drive will start automatically.
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 63
Flying restart without speed encoder
Depending on parameter P1200, after the demagnetization time has expired P0347, flying
restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max (see figure below).
3
U
3III
VWDQGDUGVOLS
PD[PD[VHDUFK
ຘຘ ຘ
This is realized either after the line supply returns when the automatic restart function has
been activated or after the last shutdown with the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit).
● V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20):
The search frequency is reduced, as a function of the DC link current with the search rate
which is calculated from parameter P1203. In so doing, the parametrizable search current
P1202 is impressed. If the search frequency is close to the rotor frequency, the DC link
current suddenly changes because the flux in the motor establishes itself. Once this state
has been reached, the search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is
changed to the voltage value of the V/f characteristic with the magnetization time P0346
(see figure below).
● Closed-loop Vector control without encoder (SLVC):
Starting from the initial value, the search frequency approaches the motor frequency with
the impressed current P1202. The motor frequency has been found if both frequencies
coincide. The search frequency is then kept constant and the flux setpoint is changed to
the rated flux with the magnetization time constant (dependent on P0346).
After the magnetization time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the
speed actual value and the motor is operated with the actual reference frequency.
W
I
I
VHDUFKPD[
6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQ
WLPH
3
)O\LQJUHVWDUW
3
3
0DJQHWL]DWLRQ
WLPH
3
5DPSXS
Figure 6-10 Flying restart
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
64 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Flying restart with speed encoder
Depending on parameter P1200, after the demagnetization time P0347 expires, the flying
restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max.
1. After the line supply returns with the automatic restart active
2. After the last shutdown using the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit)
● V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20):
For V/f control, the output voltage of the inverter is linearly increased from 0 to the V/f
characteristic value within the magnetization time P0346.
● Closed-loop Vector control with speed encoder (VC):
For the closed-loop Vector control, the necessary magnetization current is established
within the magnetization time P0346.
After the magnetization time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the
speed actual value and the motor is operated at the actual setpoint frequency.
Table 6- 16 Overview of Flying restart function
P1200 Flying restart active Search direction
0 Disabled -
1 Always Start in the direction of the setpoint
2 For line supply on and fault Start in the direction of the setpoint
3 For fault and OFF2 Start in the direction of the setpoint
4 Always Only in the direction of the setpoint
5 For line supply on, fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
6 For fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
Common Inverter Functions
6.6 Restart Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 65
Input values
Table 6- 17 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1200 = … Flying start
0 disabled (default), 1 - 6 enabled
Table 6- 18 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1202 = … Motor-current: Flying start
10 % ... 200 %, default 100 %
P1203 = … Search rate: Flying start
10 % ... 200 %, default 100 %
WARNING
When "Flying restart" is activated (P1200 > 0), although the motor is at a standstill and the
setpoint is 0, it is possible that the motor can be accelerated as a result of the search
current!
If the operating range of the motor is entered when the motor is in this state, this can result
in death, severe injury or material damage.
Note
If a higher value is entered for the search velocity P1203 this results in a flatter search curve
and therefore to an extended search time. A lower value has the opposite effect.
For "Flying restart", a braking torque is generated which can cause motors, with low
moments of inertia, to brake.
For group motors, "Flying restart" should not be activated due to the different characteristics
of the individual motors when coasting down.
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
66 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.7 Data Sets
Description
For many applications it is advantageous if several parameters can be simultaneously
changed, during operation or in the ready state, using an external signal.
This functionality can be elegantly implemented using indexed parameters. In this case, as
far as the functionality is concerned, the parameters are combined to form groups/data sets
and are indexed. By using indexing, several different settings can be saved for each
parameter which can be activated by changing-over the data set (e.g. toggling between
indexes).
The following data sets apply:
● Command Data Set CDS
● Drive Data Set DDS
Three independent settings are possible for each data set. These settings can be made
using the index of the particular parameter:
● CDS0 … CDS2
● DDS0 … DDS2
Command Data Set
Those parameters (connector and binector inputs) which are used to control the inverter and
enter a setpoint, are assigned to the command data set (CDS). The signal sources for the
control commands and setpoints are interconnected using BICO technology. For that the
connector and binector inputs are assigned corresponding to the connector and binector
outputs as signal sources. A command data set includes:
Command sources and binector inputs for control commands (digital signals) e.g.
Selects the command source P0700
ON/OFF1 P0840
OFF2 P0844
JOG Enable P1057
Enable JOG right P1055
Enable JOG left P1056
Setpoint sources and connector inputs for setpoints (analog signals) e.g.
Selection of frequency setpoint P1000
Selection of main setpoint P1070
Selection of additional setpoint P1075
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 67
The parameters, combined in a command data set, are designated with [x] in the Parameter
Manual in the index field.
Index
Pxxxx[0] Command data set 0 (CDS0)
Pxxxx[1] Command data set 1 (CDS1)
Pxxxx[2] Command data set 2 (CDS2)
Note
A complete list of all of the CDS parameters is contained in the Parameter Manual.
It is possible to parameterize up to three command data sets. This makes it easier to toggle
between various pre-configured signal sources by selecting the appropriate command data
set. A frequent application involves, for example, the ability to toggle between automatic and
manual operation.
Note
The parameters will be altered during data set switchover in the state "Ready" and "Run".
The following parameters will not be changed in the state "run:
P0350, P0352, P0354, P0356, P0358, P0360, P0362, P0363, P0364, P0365, P0366, P0367,
P0368, P0369, P0700, P0701, P0702, P0703, P0704, P0705, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0709,
P0712, P0713, P0719, P0800, P0801, P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849, P0852,
P1000, P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1070, P1071, P1075,
P1076, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140, P1141, P1142, P1330, P1500, P1501, P1503, P1511,
P1522, P1523, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2235, P2236.
The described inverter has an integrated copy function which is used to transfer command
data sets.
This can be used to copy CDS parameters corresponding to the particular application.
P0809 is used to control the copy operation as follows:
Copy operation controlled with P0809
P0809[0] Number of the command data set which is to be copied (source)
P0809[1] Number of the command data set into which data is to be copied (target)
Copying is started, if P0809[2] = 1 P0809[2]
Copying has been completed, if P0809[2] = 0
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
68 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
>@ >@ >@
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3>@ &RS\IURP&'6
3>@ &RS\WR&'6
3>@ 6WDUWFRS\
&'6 &'6 &'6
Figure 6-11 Copying from a CDS
The command data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811,
whereby the active command data set is displayed in parameter r0050 (see figure below).
Changeover is possible both in the "Ready" as well as in the "Run" states.
3
3
W
W
U
U
U
U
6HOHFWLRQRI&'6
&2%2$FW&WUO:G
&2%2$FW&WUO:G
%,&'6ELW
%,&'6ELW
&'6DFWLYH
U
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
DSSUR[PV
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
DSSUR[PV
Figure 6-12 Changing-over a CDS
The currently active command data set (CDS) is displayed using parameter r0050:
r0055
Bit15
r0054
Bit15
CDS0 0 0
CDS1 0 1
CDS2 1 0
CDS2 1 1
r0050
0
1
2
2
selected
CDS
active
CDS
Figure 6-13 Active command data set (CDS)
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 69
Example
The command source (e.g. terminals → BOP) or setpoint (frequency) source (e.g. AI → MOP)
should be changed-over using a terminal signal (e.g. DI3) as a function of an external event
(e.g. the higher-level control system fails). A typical example in this case is a mixer, which
may come to an uncontrolled stop when the control fails.
P0700[0] = 2
P0810 = 722.3
0
1
0
1
P0700[1] = 1
P1000[0] = 2
P1000[1] = 1
DI3
BOP
&RPPDQGVRXUFH 7HUPLQDO!%23
6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\VRXUFH $,!023
Motor
control
Terminals
AI
MOP
Sequence control
Setpoint
channel
Figure 6-14 Changing-over between the control and setpoint source
CDS0: Command source via terminals and setpoint source via analog input (AI)
CDS1: Command source via BOP and setpoint source via MOP
CDS changeover is realized using digital input 3 (DI3)
Commissioningsteps:
1. Carry-out commissioning for CDS0 (P0700[0] = 2 and P1000[0] = 2)
2. Connect P0810 (P0811 if required) to the CDS changeover source
(P0704[0] = 99, P0810 = 722.3)
3. Copy from CDS0 to CDS1 (P0809[0] = 0, P0809[1] = 1, P0809[2] = 1)
4. Adapt CDS1 parameters (P0700[1] = 1 and P1000[1] = 1)
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
70 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Drive data set
The drive data set (DDS) contains various setting parameters which are of significance for
the open-loop and closed-loop control of a motor:
Drive and encoder data, e.g.
Select motor type P0300
Rated motor voltage P0304
Main inductance P0360
Select encoder type P0400
Various closed-loop control parameters, e.g.
Fixed frequency 1 P1001
Min. frequency P1080
Ramp-up time P1120
Control mode P1300
The parameters, combined in a drive data set, are designated with an [x] in the Parameter
Manual in the index field:
Index
Pxxxx[0] Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
Pxxxx[1] Drive data set 1 (DDS1)
Pxxxx[2] Drive data set 2 (DDS2)
Note
A complete list of all of the DDS parameters is contained in the Parameter Manual.
It is possible to parameterize several drive data sets. This makes it easier to toggle between
various inverter configurations (control mode, control data, motors) by selecting the
appropriate drive data set (see figure below).
Note
The parameters will be altered during data set switchover in the state "Ready" and "Run".
The following parameters will not be changed in the state "run": P0300, P0304, P0305,
P0307, P0308, P0309, P0310, P0311, P0314, P0320, P0335, P0340, P0400, P0405, P0408,
P0410, P0491, P0492, P0500, P1082, P1240, P1256, P1300, P1320, P1322, P1324, P1820,
P2000, P2001, P2002, P2003, P2004, P2181.
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 71
Just like the command data sets, it is possible to copy drive data sets within the described
inverter. P0819 is used to control the copy operation as follows:
Copy operation controlled with P0819
P0819[0] Number of the drive data set which is to be
copied (source)
P0819[1] Number of the drive data set into which data is to
be copied (target)
Copying is started, if P0819[2] = 1 P0819[2]
Copying has been completed, if P0819[2] = 0
>@ >@ >@
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3>@ &RS\IURP''6
3>@ &RS\WR''6
3>@ 6WDUWFRS\
''6 ''6 ''6
Figure 6-15 Copying from a DDS
Drive data sets are changed-over using the BICO parameter P0820 and P0821 whereby the
active drive data set is displayed in parameter r0051 (see figure below). Drive data sets can
only be changed-over in the "Ready" state and this takes approximately 50 ms.
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
72 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
3
W
3
W
%,''6ELW
W
%,''6ELW
U
U
U
U
'ULYHUXQQLQJ
'ULYHUHDG\
6HOHFWLRQRI''6
&2%2$FW&WUO:G
&2%2$FW&WUO:G
''6DFWLYH
U>@
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
DSSUR[PV
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
DSSUR[PV
Figure 6-16 Changing-over a DDS
The currently active drive data set (DDS) is displayed using parameter r0051[1]:
r0055
Bit05
r0055
Bit04
DDS0 0 0
DDS1 0 1
DDS2 1 0
DDS2 1 1
r0051 [0]
0
1
2
2
r0051 [1]
0
1
2
2
selected
DDS
active
DDS
Figure 6-17 Active drive data set (DDS)
Common Inverter Functions
6.7 Data Sets
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 73
Example
The inverter should be switched-over from motor 1 to motor 2.
*
0
.
0
.
0RWRU
0RWRU
Figure 6-18 Changeover from motor 1 to motor 2
Commissioning steps with 2 motors (motor 1, motor 2):
1. Carry-out commissioning at DDS0 with motor 1; adapt the remaining DDS0 parameters.
2. Connect P0820 (P0821 if required) to the DDS changeover source
(e.g. via DI4: P0705[0] = 99, P0820 = 722.4).
3. Changeover to DDS1 (check using r0051).
4. Carry-out commissioning at DDS1 with motor 2; adapt the remaining DDS1 parameters.
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
74 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Functions of the electro-mechanical brake
WARNING
Dimensioning the electro-mechanical motor brake
The electro-mechanical brake must be dimensioned that, in case of a fault, the complete
motor can be braked to zero from any possible operational speed. If no electro-mechanical
brake is present, the machine manufacturer must adopt other suitable measures to protect
against motion after the energy supply to the motor has been cut (e.g. to protect against
sagging loads).
The electro-mechanical brake can be used as motor holding brake or as an instantaneous
brake.
● As motor holding brake it is used to prevent the motor from unintended rotation (e.g.
lifting or lowering the load in lifting applications) by applying torque in order to
compensate brake release times. The motor holding brake functionality is triggered by an
OFF1 or OFF3 command. For details see section " Motor Holding Brake (Page 75) ".
● As an instantaneous brake it slows down the motor from any speed down to zero speed
as fast as possible. The related brake release times are not considered in the case. The
instantaneous brake function is triggered by an OFF2 command. The OFF2 command
can be given manually or triggered automatically by an internal fault condition on the
inverter. On Fail-safe inverters this braking function can also be triggered by the Safe
Torque Off (STO) command or the passivated STO fault condition. (refer to the section
" Safe Brake Control (Page 245) ")
To keep the electro-mechanical brake open, it must be energized. When power is lost, or
removed from the brake, the brake closes and the motor shaft is held in position.
Note
If an electro-mechanical brake is attached, parameter P1215 needs to be enabled, otherwise
it will not be possible to run the motor!
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 75
6.8.1 Motor Holding Brake
Data
P0346, P1080, P1215 … P1218 Parameter range:
r0052 bit 12
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
For motors which must be secured when powered-down to prevent undesirable movement,
the inverter brake sequence control (enabled through P1215) can be used to control the
motor holding brake.
Before opening the brake, the pulse inhibit must be removed and a current impressed which
keeps the motor in that particular position. In this case, the impressed current is defined by
the min. frequency P1080. A typical value in this case is the rated motor slip r0330. The
rated rated motor slip r0330 indicates the value in percent of slip against synchronous run.
Thus you have to determine the slip frequency in Hz as shown in the example below:
P0310 x (r0330/100) = slip frequency
● P0310 = 50 Hz
● r0330 = 5 %
50 x (5/100) = 50 x 0.05 = 2.5 Hz
Slip frequency 5 % = 2.5 Hz
In order to protect the motor holding brake from continuous damage, the motor may only
continue to move after the brake has been released (brake release times are between 35 ms
and 500 ms). This delay must be taken into account in parameter P1216 "Holding brake
release delay" (see figure below).
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
76 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
If the motor is switched off using OFF1 or OFF3 the motor ramps down until the minimum
frequency, P1080, is reached before the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" is reset.
The motor operates at this frequency until the brake has been applied (closing times of
brakes are between 15 ms and 300 ms). The actual time is specified using min (P1217,
P1227) ("Holding time after ramp down", "Zero speed detection monitoring time").
U%LW
3
I
PLQ
3
3 3
3RLQW 3RLQW
U%LW
W
W
W
W
W
I
%UDNH
6WDWXV
0RWRUH[FLWDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
2))2))
21
2SHQ
&ORVHG
%UDNH5HOHDVH7LPH %UDNH&ORVLQJ7LPH
Figure 6-19 P1215 Motor Holding Brake OFF1/Off3
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 77
If the motor is switched off using an OFF2 command, the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake
active" is reset, independent of the motor state. This means that the brake closes
immediately after an OFF2 command if the brake closing time has finished. (instantaneous
brake).
Inactive
OFF2
Active
21
2))2))
Motor excitation
finished
r0056 Bit04
fmin
(p1080)
5&%LW
Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time
RSHQ
FORVHG
Brake-
Status
0
p1216
1
fp0346
t
t
t
t
t
t
Figure 6-20 Motor holding brake after ON/OFF2
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
78 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The mechanical brake is controlled using the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" of the
brake control. This signal is connected to terminal A and B of the power module.
WARNING
It is not sufficient to select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Brake active" in P0731 … P0733.
In order to activate the motor holding brake, in addition, parameter P1215 must also be set
to 1.
If the inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a series commissioning may not be
carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications)
unless the load has been secured. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows
before series commissioning is started:
Lower the load to the floor, or
Clamp the load using the motor holding brake
(Caution: During the series commissioning, the inverter must be prevented from
controlling the motor holding brake).
Note
Motors have optional holding brakes which are not designed to be used as brakes for normal
operation. The holding brakes are only designed for a limited number of emergency braking
operations / motor revolutions with the brake closed (refer to the Catalog data).
When commissioning a motor with integrated holding brake it is therefore absolutely
imperative that it is ensured that the holding brake functions perfectly. A "clicking noise" in
the motor indicates that the brake has been correctly released.
Before the motor holding brake is applied, a torque must be established that maintains the
motor at the required position. The pulses, from the inverter, must be enabled to allow the
necessary torque to be generated. The torque is defined by the minimum frequency in
parameter P1080. A typical value for this is the rated motor slip r0330. Additionally, this
torque can be modified using the following parameters:
● V/f control – boost parameter P1310
● SLVC – boost parameters P1610 and P1611
● VC – supplementary torque setpoint P1511
The motor holding brake can be permanently damaged, if the motor shaft is moved when the
motor holding brake is applied. It is imperative that the release of the motor holding brake is
timed correctly.
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 79
Opening the Motor Holding Brake via P1218
In a conveyor system it is sometimes necessary to position the conveyor system manually.
To achieve this you can override the brake active signal (r0052.12) using P1218, even if the
motor has been switched off or has not reached it's minimum frequency (P1080).
If the motor holding brake is active, due to a safe-stop, P1218 will be ignored.
WARNING
Since this procedure will override the active brake signal and force the brake to open, even
if the motor is switched off, the user must ensure that any load held by the motor is secured
before performing the override.
Input values
Table 6- 19 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1215 = … Holding brake enable
0 disabled (default), 1 enabled
Table 6- 20 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0346 = … Magnetization time
0 ... 20 s, default 1 s
P1080 = … Min. frequency
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz: Min. motor run frequency irrespective of frequency setpoint
P1216 = … Holding brake release delay
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1217 = … Holding time after ramp down
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1218 = … MHB override
0 ... 1, default 0
P1227 = … Zero speed detection monitoring time
0 ... 300 s, default 4 s
Output value
Parameter Description Setting
r0052.12 Brake active status
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
80 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.8.2 Instantaneous brake
Data
P0346, P1080, P1215 … P1217 Parameter range:
r0052 bit 12
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The instantaneous brake is an electro-mechanical one, being able to brake down the motor
from any speed to a standstill. It is activated after an OFF2 command and additional in the
case of a fail-safe application after a Safe Torque Off (STO) or a passivated STO fault
condition (refer to section " Safe Brake Control (Page 245) ").
The behavior of the instantaneous brake function is described below.
P0346
t
t
t
t
t
212))
0
1
OFF2
U%LW
IPLQ
3
3
I
Brake Release Time Brake Closin
g
Time
Motor excitation
finished
Open
Closed
Inactive
Active
U%LW
%UDNH
6WDWXV
Figure 6-21 Instantaneous Brake
Common Inverter Functions
6.8 Electro-Mechanical Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 81
Input values
Table 6- 21 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1215 = … Holding brake enable
0 disabled (default), 1 enabled
Table 6- 22 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0346 = … Magnetization time
0 ... 20 s, default 1 s
P1080 = … Min. frequency
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz: Min. motor run frequency irrespective of frequency setpoint
P1216 = … Holding brake release delay
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
P1217 = … Holding time after ramp down
0 ... 20 s, default 0.1 s
Output value
Parameter Description Setting
r0052.12 Brake active status
WARNING
Dimensioning the electro-mechanical motor brake
The electro-mechanical brake must be dimensioned that, in case of a fault, the complete
motor can be braked to zero from any possible operational speed.
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
82 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Description
The setpoint channel (see figure below) forms the coupling element between the setpoint
source and the closed-loop motor control. The inverter has a special characteristic which
allows the setpoint to be entered simultaneously from two setpoint sources. The generation
and subsequent modification (influencing the direction, suppression frequency, up/down
ramp) of the complete setpoint is carried-out in the setpoint channel.
56
56
$,
))
$,
6HWSRLQWVRXUFH 6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO 0RWRU
FRQWURO
0RWRU
FRQWURO
$GGLWLRQDO
VHWSRLQW
0DLQ
VHWSRLQW
680 $)0 /LPLW 5)*
023
)LHOGEXV
Figure 6-22 Setpoint channel
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 83
6.9.1 Summation and modification of frequency setpoint
Data
Parameter range: P1070 … r1114
Warnings: -
Fault: -
Function chart number: FP5000, FP5200
Description
For applications where the control quantities are generated from central control systems, fine
tuning is often required locally on-site (correction quantity). This can be elegantly realized
using the summation point where the main and supplementary (additional) setpoints are
added in the setpoint channel. In this case, both quantities are simultaneously read-in
through two separate or one setpoint source and summed in the setpoint channel.
Depending on external circumstances, the supplementary setpoint can be dynamically
disconnected or switched-in to the summation point (see figure below). This functionality can
be used to advantage, especially for discontinuous processes.
U
3&
3&
3&
3&
3&
&,0DLQVHWSRLQW
&,0DLQVHWSVFDO
%,'LVDEDGGVHWS
&,$GGVHWSRLQW
$)0 /LPLW 5)* 0RWRUFRQWURO
&,$GGVHWSVFDO
Figure 6-23 Summation
The inverter has the following possibilities to select the setpoint source:
1. P1000 – selecting the frequency setpoint source
2. BICO parameterization
– P1070 CI: Main setpoint
– P1075 CI: Additional setpoint
Further, the main setpoint as well as the supplementary (additional) setpoint can be scaled
independently of one another. In this case, for example, a user can simply implement an
override function using the appropriate parameterization.
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
84 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
A scan sequence is generally associated with a forwards and a backwards motion. When
selecting the reversing functionality, after reaching the end position, a direction of rotation
reversal can be initiated in the setpoint channel (see figure below).
On the other hand, if a direction of rotation reversal or a negative frequency setpoint is to be
prevented from being entered using the setpoint channel, then this can be inhibited using
BICO parameter P1110.
3
U 3 3 3
3
3 3
5)*
/LPLW
6NLS
680
Figure 6-24 Modifying the frequency setpoint
Motors can have one or several resonance points in the range from 0 Hz up to the reference
frequency. These resonance points result in oscillations which, under worst case conditions,
can damage the motor load. Using skip frequencies, the inverter allows these resonant
frequencies to be passed through as quickly as possible. This means that the skip
frequencies increase the availability of the motor load over the long term.
Input values
Table 6- 23 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1070 = … Main setpoint
possible source: 755 (Analog input 0) / 1024 (FF) / 1050 (MOP)
P1071 = … Main setpoint scaling
possible source: 755 (Analog input 0) / 1024 (FF) / 1050 (MOP)
P1074 = … Disable additional setpoint
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs)
P1075 = … Additional setpoint
possible source: 755 (Analog input 0) / 1024 (FF) / 1050 (MOP)
P1076 = … Additional setpoint scaling
possible source: 755 (Analog input 0) / 1024 (FF) / 1050 (MOP)
P1110 = … Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint
0: Disabled (Default)
1: Enabled
P1113 = … Reverse
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs)
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 85
Table 6- 24 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1080 = … Min. frequency
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1082 = … Max. frequency
0 ... 650 Hz, default 50 Hz
P1091 = … Skip frequency
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1092 = … Skip frequency 2
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1093 = … Skip frequency 3
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1094 = … Skip frequency 4
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1101 = … Skip frequency bandwidth
0 ... 10 Hz, default 2 Hz
Output value
Parameter Description
r1078 Total frequency setpoint
r1079 Selected frequency setpoint
r1084 Resultant max. frequency
r1114 Freq. Setp. After dir. Ctrl.
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
86 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.9.2 Ramp-function generator
Data
P1120, P1121
r1119, r1170
Parameter range:
P1130 … P1142
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP5000, FP5300
Description
The ramp-function generator (RFG) is used to limit the acceleration when the setpoint
changes according to a step function. This therefore helps to reduce the stressing on the
mechanical system of the machine. An acceleration ramp and a braking ramp can be set
independently of one another using the ramp-up time P1120 and the ramp-down time
P1121. This allows a controlled transition when the setpoint is changed (see figure below).
I
I
I
I
I
PD[
I
I
W
I
PD[
3 3
3333 W
W
XS
W
GRZQ
P1082
f
-
f
P1120
2
P1131P1130
t
12
up
⋅+
+
=
P1082
f
-
f
P1120)
2
1131P1130P
(
t
12
up
⋅+
+
=
P1120
2
P1131P1130
t
up
+
+
=
P1082
f
-
f
P1121
2
P1133P1132
t
12
down
⋅+
+
=
P1121
2
P1133P1132
tdown +
+
=
P1120
2
P1131P1130 >
+
P1121
2
P1133p1132 >
+
P1082
f
-
f
P1121)
2
1133P1132P
(
t
12
down
⋅+
+
=
P1120
2
P1131P1130 ≤
+
P1121
2
P1133P1132 ≤
+
1082P
f
-
f
12
=
:LWKRXWURXQGLQJ:LWKURXQGLQJ
'HSHQGHQF\ 5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
DOZD\VIRU
IRU
DQG
IRU
DQG
Figure 6-25 Ramp-function generator
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 87
In order to avoid torque surges at the transitions (constant velocity phase ←→
accelerating/braking phase), additional rounding-off times P1130 … P1133 can be
programmed. This is especially important for applications (e.g. transporting or pumping
liquids or for cranes) which require an especially "soft", jerk-free acceleration and braking.
If the OFF1 command is initiated while the motor is accelerating, then rounding-off can be
activated or deactivated using parameter P1134 (see figure below). These rounding-off times
are defined using parameters P1132 and P1133.
3ಹ3!
I
3
3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3
W
W
W
I
VHW
I
VHW
3 3
3 3 3
I
6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
6HWSRLQWQRWUHDFKHG
6HWSRLQWQRWUHDFKHG
6HWSRLQWUHDFKHG
21
2))
Figure 6-26 Rounding-off after an OFF1 command
In addition to the rounding-off times, the ramp-function generator can be influenced using
external signals. The ramp-function generator provides the following functionality using BICO
parameters P1140, P1141 and P1142 (see table below).
The ramp-function generator itself is enabled after the pulses have been enabled (inverter
enable) and after the excitation time has expired (P0346). After limiting to the maximum
speeds for the positive and negative directions of rotation (P1082 or 0 Hz for the direction of
rotation inhibit) the setpoint speed for the control is obtained (r1170).
While the V/f characteristic operates up to 650 Hz, the control (vector mode) is limited to a
maximum frequency of 200 Hz (r1084).
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
88 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table 6- 25 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator
Parameter Description
P1140 BI: RFG enable The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 if the binary signal
= 0.
P1141 BI: RFG start The ramp-function generator output keeps its actual value if the
binary signal = 0.
P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint If the binary signal = 0, then the ramp-function generator input is
set to 0 and the output is reduced to 0 through the ramp-function
generator ramp.
Note
The maximum frequency of the setpoint channel is set using parameter P1080.
In V/f mode the maximum frequency is 650 Hz.
In vector mode the maximum frequency is 200 Hz (r1084).
Input values
Table 6- 26 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1120 = … Ramp-up time
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1121 = … Ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1130 = … Ramp-up initial rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1131 = … Ramp-up final rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1132 = … Ramp-down initial rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1133 = … Ramp-down final rounding time
0 ... 40 s, default 0 s
P1113 = … Reverse
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs)
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 89
Table 6- 27 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1134 = … Rounding type
0: Continuous smoothing (default)
1: Discontinuous smoothing
P1135 = … OFF3 ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 5 s
P1140 = … RFG enable
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.4 (option port) / r2090.4 (serial interface)
P1141 = … RFG start
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.5 (option port) / r2090.5 (serial interface)
P1142 = … RFG enable setpoint
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2032.6 (option port) / r2090.6 (serial interface)
Output value
Parameter Description
r1119 Freq. Setpoint before RFG
r1170 Frequency setpoint after RFG
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
90 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.9.3 OFF/Braking Functions
Data
Parameter range: P1121, P1135, P2167, P2168
P0840 … P0849
r0052 bit 02
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
Both the inverter and the user have to respond to a wide range of situations and stop the
inverter if needed. Thus operating requirements as well as inverter protective functions (e.g.
electrical or thermal overload), or rather man-machine protective functions, have to be taken
into account. Due to the different OFF/braking functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) the inverter
can flexibly respond to the mentioned requirements.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is strongly coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is
withdrawn, then OFF1 is directly activated. The motor is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-
down time P1121. In case the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and
the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled.
W
W
WGRZQ2))
3
I
IPD[
U%LW
3
WGRZQ2)) 3ವ3
I
IDFW
3
3
2))
3XOVH
FDQFHOODWLRQ
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 6-27 OFF1 brake function
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 91
Note
You can configure the OFF1 command via the function "positioning ramp down". In this
case, OFF1 generates a continuous braking ramp depending on the actual load speed and
velocity.
OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter P0840
(BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing).
BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700.
The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source.
If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input
that was last set, is valid, e.g. DI3 is active.
OFF1 is low active.
When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies:
OFF2 (highest priority)
OFF3
OFF1.
OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking.
When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168
are not taken into account.
OFF2
The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. Thus the motor
coasts down and it is not possible to brake in a controlled fashion.
W
W
U%LW
3
IPD[
IDFW
2))
3XOVH
FDQFHOODWLRQ
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 6-28 OFF2 brake function
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
92 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Note
The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are defined
using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2).
As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the OP. This
source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as
command source → P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using DI2 → P0702 = 3).
OFF2 is low-active.
When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies:
OFF2 (highest priority)
OFF3
OFF1.
OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of
the autonomous OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter
value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled as
for the OFF1 command.
W
W
3
I
I
PD[
U%LW
3
I
DFW
3
3
W
GRZQ
2))
W
GRZQ
2)) 3ವ3
I
2))
3XOVH
FDQFHOODWLRQ
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 6-29 OFF3 brake function
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 93
Note
OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters P0848
(BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
OFF3 is low active.
When simultaneously selecting the various OFF commands, the following priority applies:
OFF2 (highest priority)
OFF3
OFF1.
Input values
Table 6- 28 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0840 = … ON/OFF1
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.0 (option port) / 2090.0 (serial interface)
P0842 = … ON reverse/OFF1
possible source: 722.x (digital input)
P0844 = … 1. OFF2
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.1 (option port) / 2090.1 (serial interface)
P0845 = … 2. OFF2
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.1 (option port) / 2090.1 (serial interface)
P0848 = … 1. OFF3
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.2 (option port) / 2090.2 (serial interface)
P0849 = … 2. OFF3
possible source: 722.x (digital input) / 2032.2 (option port) / 2090.2 (serial interface)
P1121 = … Ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 10 s
P1135 = … OFF3 ramp-down time
0 ... 650 s, default 5 s
P2167 = … Switch-off frequency f_off
0 ... 10 Hz, default 1 Hz: Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| > P2167
P2168 = … Delay time T_off
0 ... 10000 ms, default 10 ms: Defines time inverter operating below switch-off freq. (P2167)
before switch off occurs.
Output value
Parameter Description
r0052.2 Drive running
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
94 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.9.4 Manual and Automatic Operation
Data
Parameter range: P0700, P1000
P0810, P0811
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
It is necessary to change-over from the automatic mode into the manual mode to load and
unload production machines and to feed new materials (e.g. batch processing). The machine
operator carries-out the preparatory activities for subsequent automatic operation in the
manual mode. In the manual mode, the machine operator locally controls the machine
(enters the ON/OFF command as well as also the setpoint). A changeover is only made into
the automatic mode after the set-up has been completed. In the automatic mode, the control
(open-loop) of the machines and production processes are handled by a higher-level control
system (e.g. PLC). This operation is maintained until it is necessary to again load and unload
the machine or feed new material into the machine or production process.
Indexed parameters P0700 or P1000 and BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to
changeover (toggle between) the manual/automatic modes. The command source is defined
using P0700 and the setpoint source is defined using P1000, whereby index 0 (P0700[0] and
P1000[0]) defines the automatic mode and index 1 (P0700[1] and P1000[1]) the manual
mode. BICO parameters P0810 and P0811 are used to changeover (toggle between) the
automatic and manual modes. These BICO parameters can be controlled from any control
source. In so doing, in addition to P0700 and P1000, also all of the other CDS parameters
are changed over (manual/automatic changeover is generalized as a CDS changeover).
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 95
3
3
3>@
3>@
3>@
3>@
5656
)LHOGEXV
&RPPDQGVRXUFH
3
6HWSRLQWVRXUFH
3
7HUPLQDOV
%23
023
$,
))
&PG
UHPRWH
&PG
ORFDO
&PG
&'6
6HWSRLQW
UHPRWH
6HWSRLQW
ORFDO
6HWSRLQW
FKDQQHO
6HTXHQFHFRQWURO
0RWRU
FRQWURO
6HWSRLQW
&'6
Figure 6-30 Changing-over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811
Input values
Table 6- 29 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0700 = … Selection of command source
0: Factor default setting
1: BOP
2: Terminal
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
P0810 = … CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto)
possible source (0 = default):
722.x: Digital inputs
2032.15: USS on RS232
2036.15: USS on RS485
2090.15: Fieldbus
P0811 = … CDS bit 1
possible source (0 = default):
722.x: Digital inputs
2033.15: USS on RS232
2037.15: USS on RS485
2091.15: Fieldbus
P1000 = … Selection of frequency setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
1: MOP setpoint
2: Analog setpoint (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
3: Fixed frequency
4: USS on RS232
6: Fieldbus (default, depending on the type of Frequency inverter)
7: Analog setpoint 2
10: No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
...
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
96 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.9.5 FFBs and Fast FFBs
Data
Parameter range: P2800 … P2890
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP4800 … FP4830
Cycle time: 128 ms (FFB)
8 ms (Fast FFB)
Description
For many applications, interlocking logic is required in order to control (open-loop) the
inverter. This interlocking logic couples several states (e.g. access control, plant/system
state) to form a control signal (e.g. ON command). Previously this was implemented using
either a PLC or relays. This represented additional costs for the plant or system. In addition
to logic operations, increasingly, arithmetic operations and storage elements are required in
inverters which generate a new unit from several physical quantities. This simplified PLC
functionality is integrated in the inverter using the following following components:
● Freely programmable function blocks (FFB)
● Fast freely programmable function blocks (Fast FFB)
Differences of FFB and Fast FFB
FFB and Fast FFB work like two independent functions, but the same block cannot be used
in both functions in the same time.
The function FFB is called within the 128 ms time slice (cycle time). In the function FFB all of
the blocks can be used. The following blocks can be used only within the 128 ms time slice:
● Timers-blocks
● ADD-blocks
● SUB-blocks
● MUL-blocks
● DIV-blocks
● CMP-blocks
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 97
The function Fast FFB is called within the 8 ms time slice. In Fast FFB only the following
blocks are available:
● AND -blocks
● OR-blocks
● XOR-blocks
● NOT-blocks
● Flip-Flops
Enabling
The FFB and Fast FFB are enabled in two steps:
1. General enable P2800:
The function FFB is enabled using parameter P2800 (P2800 =1).
The function Fast FFB is enabled using parameter P2803 (P2803 = 1)
2. Specific enable P2801, P2802:
– FFB
Using parameter P2801 or P2802, the particular function block is enabled (P2801[x] or
P2802[x] = 1...3) and the sequence in which they are executed is also defined.
– Fast FFB
Using parameter P2801 the particular function block is enabled (P2801[x] = 4...6)
Priority
Additionally, adapt to the application, the chronological sequence in which the blocks are
executed, can also be controlled. This is especially important so that the blocks executed in
the sequence which is technologically correct. Parameter 2801 and P2802 are used for the
individual enable function as well as to define the priority in which the blocks are executed.
The following priority levels can be assigned:
● 0 = Inactive
● 1 = Level 1 (FFB)
● 2 = Level 2 (FFB)
● 3 = Level 3 (FFB)
● 4 = Level 4 (Fast FFB)
● 5 = Level 5 (Fast FFB)
● 6 = Level 6 (Fast FFB)
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
98 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The figure below indicates that the priority decreases from the top towards the bottom
(priority 1 → level) or from the right to left (priority 2 → line).
3>@&03
3>@$1'
3>@&03
3>@$1'
3>@',9
3>@$1'
3>@',9
3>@08/
3>@08/
3>@68%
3>@68%
3>@$''
3>@$''
3>@
3>@
3>@
3>@25
3>@
3>@56))
3>@56))
3>@56))
3>@'))
3>@'))
3>@127
3>@127
3>@25
3>@127
3>@;25
3>@;25
3>@;25
3>@25
/HYHO
7LPHU
7LPHU
7LPHU
7LPHU
/HYHO
/HYHO
,QDFWLYH
/HYHO
/RZ
/RZ
+LJK
3ULRULW\
3ULRULW\
/HYHO
/HYHO
Figure 6-31 Free function block priorities
Input values
Table 6- 30 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2800 = … Enable FFBs
0: Disabled (default)
1: Enabled
P2801 = … Activate FFBs/Fast FFBs
0: Not active (default)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
4: Level 4 (Fast FFB)
5: Level 5 (Fast FFB)
6: Level 6 (Fast FFB)
P2802 = … Activate FFBs
0: Not active (default)
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
P2803 = … Enable Fast FFBs
0: Disable (default)
1: Enable
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 99
Parameter Description Setting
P2810 = … AND 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2800 P2801[0]
A
BC
&
P2810
r2811
ABC
000
010
100
111
Index0
Index1
P2812 = … AND 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2814 = … AND 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2816 = … OR 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
A
BC
P2816
r2817
ABC
000
011
101
111
1
P2800 P2801[3]
Index0
Index1
P2818 = … OR 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2820 = … OR 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2822 = … XOR 1
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
A
BC
P2822
r2823
ABC
000
011
101
110
1
=
P2800 P2801[6]
Index0
Index1
P2824 = … XOR 2
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2826 = … XOR 3
Index: [0] = BI 0 , [1] = BI 1
P2828 = … NOT 1
defines input of NOT 1
P2828
r2829
1CA AC
01
10
P2800 P2801[9]
Index0
P2830 = … NOT 2
defines input of NOT 2
P2832 = … NOT 3
defines input of NOT 2
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
100 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P2834 = … D-FlipFlop 1
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: D input, [2] = BI: store pulse, [3] = BI: reset
1
P2834 SET (Q=1)
RESET (Q=0)
D
STORE
POWER ON
r2835
r2836
Q
Q
P2800 P2801[12]
Index0
Index1
Index2
Index3
SET RESET D STORE Q Q
10xx10
01xx01
11xxQ
n-1
Q
n-1
001 10
000 01
POWER -ON 0 1
P2837 = … D-FlipFlop 2
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: D input, [2] = BI: store pulse, [3] = BI: reset
P2840 = … RS-FlipFlop 1
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: reset
P2800 P2801[14]
SET
(Q=1)
RESET
(Q=0)
Q
Q
P2840
POWER ON 1
r2841
r2842
Index 0
Index 1
SET RESET Q Q
00Q
n-1
Q
n-1
0101
1010
11Q
n-1
Q
n-1
POWER-ON 0 1
P2843 = … RS-FlipFlop 2
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: reset
P2846 = … RS-FlipFlop 3
Index: [0] = BI: set, [1] = BI: reset
P2849 = … Timer 1
defines input signal of timer 1
T0
0T
TT
r2852
1r2853
P284 9
0/10
1/11
2/12
3/13
InOut
NOut
P2851(0)
P2850 (0.000)
P2800 P2802.0 Delay Time Mode
ON Delay
OFF Delay
ON/OFF Delay
Pulse Generator
Index0
T
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 101
Parameter Description Setting
P2850 = … Delay time of timer 1
defines delay time of timer 1
P2851 = … Mode timer 1
0: ON delay (sec)
1: OFF delay (sec)
2: ON/OFF delay (sec)
3: pulse generator (sec)
10: ON delay (min)
11: OFF delay (min)
12: ON/OFF delay (min)
13: pulse generator (min)
P2854 = … Timer 2
defines input signal of timer 2
P2855 = … Delay time of timer 2
defines delay time of timer 2
P2856 = … Mode timer 2
see P2851 for modes
P2859 = … Timer 3
defines input signal of timer 3
P2860 = … Delay time of timer 3
defines delay time of timer 3
P2861 = … Mode timer 3
see P2851 for modes
P2864 = … Timer 4
defines input signal of timer 4
P2865 = … Delay time of timer 4
defines delay time of timer 4
P2866 = … Mode timer 4
see P2851 for modes
P2869 = … ADD 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
r2870
x1
x2
200 %
-200 %
P2800 P2802[4]
Result = x1 + x2
If: x1 + x2 > 200%
→
x1 + x2 < -200%
→
Result = 200%
Result = -200%
Result
P28 6 9
x1 + x2
Index 0
Index 1
P2871 = … ADD 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2873 = … SUB 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
r2874
x1
x2
200 %
-200 %
P2800 P2802[6]
Result = x1 - x2
If: x1 - x2 > 200% →
x1 - x2 < -200%
→
Result = 200%
Result = -200%
Result
P2873
x1 + x2
Index 0
Index 1
P2875 = … SUB 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
102 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P2877 = … MUL 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
r2878
x1
x2
200 %
-200 %
100%
x2x1∗
> 200%
→
< -200%
→
%100
2x1x
%100
2x1x
∗
∗
Result = 200%
Result = -200%
If:
P2877
Index 0
Index 1
%100
2x1x ∗
P2800 P2802[8]
Result =
Result
P2879 = … MUL 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2881 = … DIV 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
r2882
x1
x2
200 %
-200 %
2X
%1001x ∗
x2
100%x1∗
P2800 P2802[10]
> 200% →
< -200%
→
x2
100%x1
x2
100%x1
∗
∗
Result = 200%
Result = -200%
If:
P28 8 1
Index 1
Index 0
Result =
Result
P2883 = … DIV 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2885 = … CMP 1
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2885
r2886
x1
x2
Out
x1 ≥ x2 → Out = 1
x1 < x2 → Out = 0
P2800 P2802[12]
Out = x 1 ≥ x2
CMP
Index 0
Index 1
P2887 = … CMP 2
Index: [0] = CI 0, [1] = CI 1
P2889 = … Fixed setpoint 1 in [%]
-200 ... 200 %, default 0 %
P2889
P2890
Connector Setting in %
Range : -200% ... 200%
P2890 = … Fixed setpoint 2 in [%]
-200 ... 200 %, default 0 %
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 103
Output value
r2811 AND 1
r2813 AND 2
r2815 AND 3
r2817 OR 1
r2819 OR 2
r2821 OR 3
r2823 XOR 1
r2825 XOR 2
r2827 XOR 3
r2829 NOT 1
r2831 NOT 2
r2833 NOT 3
r2835 Q D-FF1
r2836 NOT-Q D-FF1
r2838 Q D-FF2
r2839 NOT-Q D-FF2
r2841 Q RS-FF1
r2842 NOT-Q RS-FF1
r2844 Q RS-FF2
r2845 NOT-Q RS-FF2
r2847 Q RS-FF3
r2848 NOT-Q RS-FF3
r2852 Timer 1
r2853 Nout timer 1
r2857 Timer 2
r2858 Nout timer 2
r2862 Timer 3
r2863 Nout timer 3
r2867 Timer 4
r2868 Nout timer 4
r2870 ADD 1
r2872 ADD 2
r2874 SUB 1
r2876 SUB 2
r2878 MUL 1
r2880 MUL 2
r2882 DIV 1
r2884 DIV 2
r2886 CMP 1
r2888 CMP 2
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
104 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Example 1
Enabling the FFBs: P2800 = 1
Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[0] = 1 AND 1
P2801[1] = 2 AND 2
P2801[2] = 3 AND 3
P2802[12] = 2 CMP 1
P2802[13] = 3 CMP 2
The FFBs are calculated in the following sequence: AND 3 → CMP 2 → AND 2 → CMP 1 → AND 1
Example 2
Enabling the FFBs: P2800 = 1
Enabling individual FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[3] = 2 OR 1
P2801[4] = 2 OR 2
P2802[3] = 3 Timer 4
P2801[0] = 1 AND 1
The FFBs are calculated in the following sequence: Timer 4 → OR 1 → OR 2 → AND 1
Example 3 Fast FFB
Enabling the Fast FFBs: P2803 = 1
Enabling individual Fast FFB including assigning a priority:
P2801[3] = 6 OR 1
P2801[4] = 5 OR 2
P2801[0] = 4 AND 1
The Fast FFBs are calculated in the following
sequence:
OR 1 → OR 2 → AND 1
The function blocks are interconnected using BICO technology. In so doing, the function
blocks can be connected with one another as well as to other signals and quantities as long
as these signals or quantities have the appropriate attribute (BO, BI, CO and CI).
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 105
6.9.6 Wobble Generator
Data
Parameter range: P2940, P2945 - P2949
r2955
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP5110
Cycle time: 2 ms
Description
The wobble generator executes predefined periodical disruptions superimposed on the main
setpoint for technological usage in the fibre industry. Both, the positive and the negative
pulse jump can be parameterized, and the wobble function can be activated via P2940. The
wobble signal is added to the main setpoint as an additional setpoint. The wobble function is
only active, when the setpoint is reached. While ramping up or down, the wobble signal will
not be added. The wobble signal is also limited by the maximum frequency.
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
106 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Function
The wobble generator can be started and parameterized via the parameters shown below. It
is independent of the setpoint direction, thus only the absolute value of the setpoint is
relevant. During the change of the setpoint the wobble function is inactive. The frequency
values of the wobble functions are limited by the maximal frequency (P1082). If the wobble
function is deactivated, the wobble signal is set to 0 immediately.
Note
The wobble signal is blocked during
- DC braking
- flying restart
- vdc max controller active
I-max controller active
6HWSRLQWIUHTXHQF\
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
U[
%2367$57(5
U
866RQ56
U
866RQ56
U
W
W
3
3
3
3
352),%86
U
352),QHW
U
3
3 3
3
3
3
Figure 6-32 Wobble function disturb signal
Common Inverter Functions
6.9 Setpoint Channel
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 107
Input values
Table 6- 31 Main function parameter
Parameter Description Setting
P2940 = … Release Wobble function
Defines the source to release the wobble function, e.g. DI or any BO parameter (0 = default)
Table 6- 32 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2945 = … Signal frequency
0.1 ... 120 RPM, default 60 RPM: Sets the frequency of the wobble-signal
P2946 = … Signal amplitude
0 ... 0.2, default 0: Sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal
P2947 = … Wobble negative pulse jump
0 ... 1, default 0: Sets the value for negative pulse jump at the end of the positive signal period
P2948 = … Wobble positive pulse jump
0 ... 1, default 0: Sets the value for positive pulse jump at the end of the negative signal period
P2949 = … Signal pulse width
0 ... 100 %, default 50 %: Sets the value for the pulse width of the wobble-signal
Output value
r2955 Wobble function: signal output
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
108 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10 Control Functions
6.10.1 Open-loop and closed-loop control overview
Overview
There are several open-loop and closed-loop techniques for closed-loop speed and torque
control for inverters with induction and synchronous motors. These techniques can be
roughly classified as follows:
● V/f characteristic control (known as: V/f control)
● Field-orientated closed-loop control technique (known as: Vector control)
The field-orientated control technique – Vector control – can be further sub-divided into two
groups:
● Vector control without speed feedback (sensorless Vector control (SLVC))
● Vector control with speed feedback (Vector control (VC))
These techniques differ from one another both regarding the control ability and in the
complexity of the technique, which in turn are obtained as a result of the requirements
associated with a particular application. For basic applications (e.g. pumps and fans), to a
large extent, V/f control is used. Vector control is mainly used for sophisticated applications
(e.g. winders), where a good control and behavior in noisy conditions are required regarding
the speed and torque. If these requirements are also present in the range from 0 Hz to
approx. 1 Hz, then the speed/torque accuracy without encoder is not sufficient. In this case,
Vector control with speed feedback must be used.
6.10.2 V/f Control
Data
P1300 Parameter range:
P1310 … P1350
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP6100
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 109
Description
The V/f characteristic represents the simplest control technique. In this case the stator
voltage of the induction motor or synchronous motor is adjusted proportionally to the stator
frequency. This technique has proven itself for a wide range of "basic" applications, such as
● Pumps, fans
● Belt motors
and similar processes.
The goal of V/f control is to keep the flux Φ constant in the motor. In this case, this is
proportional to the magnetizing current Iμ and the ratio between voltage V and frequency f.
Φ ~ Iμ ~ V/f
The torque M, developed by induction motors, is proportional to the product (precisely the
Vectorial product Φ x I) of flux and current.
M ~ Φ * I
In order to generate the maximum possible torque from a given current, the flux must be held
constant at its nominal value. That means, the value of the magnetizing current must be
constant even if the stator frequency changes. This can be achieved approximately if the
stator voltage U is changed proportional to the stator frequency. The V/f characteristic
control is derived from these basic principles.
I
803˓
83
0
Q
˓
Q
0˓
I
Q
I
PD[
83
5DWHGPRWRU
RSHUDWLQJSRLQW
Figure 6-33 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from an inverter
There are several versions of the V/f characteristic as shown in the table below.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
110 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table 6- 33 V/f characteristics (parameter P1300)
Parameter
value
Significance Use/property
0 Linear
characteristic
Standard case
9
Q
I
Q
9
I
3
1 FCC Can give a more efficient and better load response than other V/f
modes because the FCC characteristic automatically compensates
the voltage losses of the stator resistance for static (steady-state) or
dynamic loads (flux current control FCC). This is used especially for
small motors which have a relatively high stator resistance.
2 Square-law
characteristic
This is a characteristic which takes into
consideration the torque characteristic of
the motor load (e.g. fan/pump):
a) Square-law characteristic
(f2 characteristic)
b) Energy saving as the lower voltage
also results in lower currents and losses.
9
Q
I
Q
9
I
3
3 Programmable
characteristic
Characteristic which takes into
consideration the torque characteristic of
the motor/driven load (e.g. synchronous
motor).
9
3
I
3
I
PD[
3
9
PD[
U
9
Q
3
3
3
I
+]
I
3
I
3
I
Q
3
I
3
3
5 Application
adaptation
This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special
technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications),
a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the
output voltage and not the output frequency, and
b) By inhibiting the slip compensation
6 Application
adaptation
with FCC
This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the special
technological issues of an application (e.g. textile applications),
a) Where the current limiting (Imax controller) only influences the
output voltage and not the output frequency, and
b) By inhibiting the slip compensation
19 Independent
voltage input
The user can enter the output voltage of the inverter, independently
of the frequency, using a BICO parameter P1330 via the interfaces
(e.g. analog input → P1330 = 755).
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 111
Input values
Table 6- 34 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1300 = … Control mode
0: V/f with linear characteristic (default)
1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Sensorless vector control
21: Vector control with sensor
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
23: Vector torque-control with sensor
P1335 = … Slip compensation
0 ... 600 %, default 0 %
Table 6- 35 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1310 = … Continuous boost
0 ... 250 %, default 50 %
P1311 = … Acceleration boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %
P1312 = … Starting boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %
P1316 = … Boost end frequency
0 ... 100 Hz, default 20 Hz
P1320 = … Programmable V/f freq. Coord. 1
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1321 = … Programmable V/f volt. Coord. 1
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
P1322 = … Programmable V/f freq. Coord. 2
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1323 = … Programmable V/f volt. Coord. 2
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
P1324 = … Programmable V/f freq. Coord. 3
0 ... 650 Hz, default 0 Hz
P1325 = … Programmable V/f volt. Coord. 3
0 ... 3000 V, default 0 V
P1330 = … Voltage setpoint
P1333 = … Start frequency for FCC
0 ... 100 Hz, default 10 Hz
P1334 = … Slip compensation activation range
1 ... 20 Hz, default 6 Hz
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
112 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P1336 = … Slip limit
0 ... 600 %, default 250 %
P1338 = … Resonance damping gain V/f
0 ... 10, default 0
P1340 = … Imax controller prop. gain
0 ... 0.499, default 0
P1341 = … Imax controller integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s
P1345 = … Imax voltage ctrl. Prop. gain
0 ... 5.499, default 0.250
P1346 = … Imax voltage ctrl. Integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s
P1350 = … Voltage soft start
0: OFF (default)
1: ON
Output value
r1315 Total boost voltage
r1337 V/f slip frequency
r1343 Imax controller freq. Output
Displays effective frequency limitation of the inverter.
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.
r1334 Imax controller volt. Output
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 113
6.10.2.1 Voltage boost
Data
P1310 … P1312 Parameter range:
r0056 bit 05
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP6100
Description
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only give a low output voltage. The ohmic
resistances of the stator winding play a role at low frequencies, which are neglected when
determining the motor flux in V/f control. This means that the output voltage can be too low in
order to:
● implement the magnetization of an induction motor,
● to hold the load
● to equalize losses (ohmic losses in the winding resistances) in the system or
● to provide a breakaway/accelerating/braking torque.
The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in the inverter using the parameters as
shown in the table below.
Note
Especially at low frequencies, the motor temperature is additionally increased as a result of
the voltage boost (the motor overheats)!
The voltage value at 0 Hz is determined from the product of rated motor current P0305,
stator resistance P0350 and the appropriate parameters P1310 … P1312.
If a wrong stator resistance is used, the current applied to the motor is not the same as
specified in P1310 … P1312. This may cause overcurrent (F0001).
Using very high boost values may cause the motor to stuck at a low frequency due to the
Imax controller (very high boost may cause overcurrent failure).
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
114 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table 6- 36 Voltage boost
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation
P1310 Constant voltage
boost
The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency rage whereby the
value continually decreases at high frequencies.
9
9PD[
9
Q
3
9
&RQ%RRVW
9
&RQ%RRVW
I
%RRVWHQG
I
Q
I
PD[
I
3 3 3
/LQHDU9I
DFWXDO9
%RRVW
2XWSXWYROWDJH
1RUPDO9I
3
P1311 Voltage boost when
accelerating or braking
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.
9
9PD[
9Q
3
9&RQ%RRVW
9&RQ%RRVW
I%RRVWHQG IQIPD[
I
3 3 3
/LQHDU9I
DFWXDO9%RRVW
2XWSXWYROWDJH
1RUPDO9I
3
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 115
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation
P1312 Voltage boost when
starting
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill)
I
I
Q
9
9PD[
9
Q
3
9
&RQ%RRVW
9
&RQ%RRVW
I
%RRVWHQG
I
PD[
3 3 3
/LQHDU9I
DFWXDO9
%RRVW
2XWSXWYROWDJH
1RUPDO9I
3
Input values
Table 6- 37 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1310 = … Continuous boost
0 ... 250 %, default 50 %: Defines boost level relative to rated motor current (P0305)
P1312 = … Starting boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %: Applies a constant linear offset relative to rated motor current (P0305)
Table 6- 38 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1311 = … Acceleration boost
0 ... 250 %, default 0 %: Applies boost relative to rated motor current (P0305)
Output value
Parameter Description
r0056 bit 5 Status of motor control - Starting boost active
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
116 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.2.2 Slip compensation
Data
Parameter range: P1335
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP6100
Description
In the V/f characteristic operating mode the motor frequency is always lower than the inverter
output frequency by the slip frequency fs. If the load (the load is increased from M1 to M2) is
increased with a constant output frequency, then the slip increases and the motor frequency
decreases (from f1 to f2). This behavior, typical for an induction motor, can be compensated
using slip compensation P1335. This therefore eliminates the speed reduction, caused by
the load, by boosting (increasing) the inverter output frequency (see figure below).
00
00
00
ෙII
I
I
ෙII
I
IIRXW0
IRXW0
:LWKRXWVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ :LWKVOLSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
Figure 6-34 Slip compensation
Input values
Table 6- 39 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1335 = … Slip compensation
0 ... 600 %, default 0 %
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 117
6.10.2.3 V/f resonance damping
Data
Parameter range: P1338
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
Resonance effects result in an increased noise level and also can damage or destroy the
mechanical system. These resonance effects can occur for:
● Geared motors
● Reluctance motors
● Large motors
(low stator resistance → poor electrical damping)
The V/f resonance damping function is working between 6 % and 80 % of the rated motor
frequency when enabled.
Contrary to the "skip frequency" function and parameters P1091 … P1094, where the
resonance frequency is passed through as quickly as possible, for the V/f resonance
damping (P1338), the resonance effects are dampened from a control-related perspective.
The advantage of this function is that by using this active damping, operation is possible in
the resonance range.
The V/f resonance damping is activated and adjusted using parameter P1338. This
parameter represents a gain factor that is a measure for the damping of the resonance
frequency. The following oscillogram indicates the effect of the resonance damping function
using as an example a reluctance motor with gearbox. The phase output currents are
displayed for an output frequency of 45 Hz.
:LWKRXW9IUHVRQDQFHGDPSLQJ3 9IUHVRQDQFHGDPSLQJDFWLYH3
Figure 6-35 Resonance damping
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
118 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Table 6- 40 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1338 = … Resonance damping gain V/f
0 ... 10, default 0: Scales di/dt of the active current
6.10.2.4 V/f control with FCC
Data
Parameter range: P1300, P1333
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The inverters have a current measurement function, which permits the output current to be
precisely determined referred to the motor voltage. This measurement guarantees the output
current to be sub-divided into a load component and a flux component. Using this sub-
division, the motor flux can be controlled and can be appropriately adapted and optimized in-
line with the prevailing conditions.
FCC operation is only activated after the FCC starting frequency P1333 has been exceeded.
The FCC starting frequency P1333 is entered as a percentage to the rated motor frequency
P0310. For a rated motor frequency of 50 Hz and a factory setting of P1333 = 10 %, this
results in an FCC starting frequency of 5 Hz. The FCC starting frequency may not be
selected too low as this has a negative impact on the control characteristics and can result in
oscillation and system instability.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 119
The "V/f with FCC" control type (P1300 = 1) has proven itself in many applications. It has the
following advantages with respect to the standard V/f control:
● Higher motor efficiency
● Improved stabilizing characteristics
– higher dynamic response
– improved behavior to disturbances/control.
Note
Contrary to closed-loop vector control, for the V/f open-loop control mode with FCC, it
is not possible to specifically influence the motor torque. This is the reason that it isn’t
always possible to avoid the motor stalling – even when using "V/f with FCC".
An improvement in the stabilizing behavior and in the motor efficiency can be
expected when using the closed-loop vector control when compared to V/f control with
FCC.
Input values
Table 6- 41 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1300 = … Control mode
0: V/f with linear characteristic (default)
1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Sensorless vector control
21: Vector control with sensor
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
23: Vector torque-control with sensor
P1333 = … Start frequency for FCC
0 ... 100 %, default: 10 %: Defines start frequency at which FCC is enabled as [%] of rated
motor frequency (P0310)
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
120 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.2.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)
Data
P1340 … P1346 Parameter range:
r0056 bit 13
Warnings: A0501
Faults: F0001
Function chart number: FP6100
Description
In the V/f characteristic mode, the inverter has a current limiting controller in order to avoid
overload conditions (I_max controller, see figure below). This controller protects the inverter
and the motor against continuous overload by automatically reducing the inverter output
frequency by fImax (r1343) or the inverter output voltage by VImax (r1344). By reducing the
frequency and following the voltage, the stressing on the inverter is reduced and it is
protected against continuous overload and damage.
If a regenerative Power Module (PM250, PM260 or G120D) is connected and the motor
operates in regenerative mode (r0032 < 0) the frequency will increase.
U
U
8,BPD[
.S
.S 7Q
7Q
I,BPD[
U
U
,PD[FWUOSUSJDLQ
3'
,PD[FWUOLQWWLPH
>V@
3'
0RWRU7HPSHUDWXUH
,QYHUWHU7HPSHUDWXUH
LtWLQYHUWHU
,PD[FRQWUROOHUVHWSRLQW
30RWRU
UDWHGFXUUHQW
0RWRURYOIDFW>@
>@
3'
&22XWSFXUOLPLW>$@
&22XWSXWFXUUHQW>$@
&2,PD[FWUO)RXWS
&2,PD[FWUO9RXWS
&XUUHQWIHHGEDFN
,PD[YROWSUSJDLQ
>V@
3'
,PD[YROWLQWWLPH
>V@
3'
Figure 6-36 I_max controller
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 121
Note
The inverter load is only reduced when the frequency is reduced if the load decreases at
lower speeds (e.g. square-law torque –speed characteristic of the motor load).
In regenerative mode the current will only decrease if the torque decreases with a higher
frequency
Input values
Table 6- 42 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1340 = … I_max controller prop. gain
0 ... 0.499, default 0: Proportional gain of the I_max controller
P1341 = … I_max controller integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s: Integral time constant of the I_max controller
0 : The I_max controller is OFF
P1345 = … I_max voltage ctrl. Prop. gain
0 ... 5.499, default 0.250: Proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller
P1346 = … I_max voltage ctrl. Integral time
0 ... 50 s, default 0.3 s: Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller
Output value
Parameter Description
r0056 bit13 Status of motor control - I_max controller active/torque limit reached
r1343 I_max controller freq. Output
Displays effective frequency limitation of the inverter.
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows max. frequency P1082.
r1344 I_max controller volt. Output
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
122 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.3 Vector Control
Description
Field-orientated Vector control (known as: Vector control) significantly improves torque
control when compared to V/f control. The Vector control principle is based on the fact that
for a specific load situation or required torque, the required motor current is impressed with
respect to the motor flux so that the appropriate torque is obtained. If the stator current is
emulated in a circulating coordinate system, linked with the rotor flux Φ, then it can be
broken-down into the flux-generating current component id in-line with the rotor flux and into
a torque-generating current component iq, vertical to the rotor flux. These components are
corrected to track their setpoints in the current controller using their own dedicated PI
controllers and are equal quantities in steady-state operation.
L
L
L
˶
˶
˶
P5
P5
L
6
W
L
E
D
G
L
T
0HDVXUHGVWHDG\VWDWHWUDMHFWRULHV
5RWRUD[LV
)OX[D[LV
6WDWRUD[LV
Figure 6-37 Current vector diagram in a steady-state condition
In the steady-state condition, the field-generating current component id is proportional to the
flux Φ and the torque is proportional to the product of id and iq.
M ~ Φ * iq
Φ ~ id,stat
M ~ id * iq
When compared to V/f control, Vector control has the following advantages:
● Stable during load and setpoint changes
● Short rise times for setpoint changes (→ better control performance)
● Short rise times for load changes (→ better noise/disturbance characteristics)
● Accelerating and braking are possible with a max. adjustable torque
● The motor and motor machine are protected using the adjustable torque limit, both when
motoring and regenerating
● The motor and braking torque are controlled independently of the speed
● Full holding torque is possible at 0 speed.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 123
These advantages are, under certain circumstances, already achieved without using speed
feedback.
The Vector control can be used both with and without speed encoder.
The following criteria provide a basis as to when a speed actual value encoder is required:
● High speed accuracy is required
● High requirements are placed on the dynamic response
– Improved control performance
– Improved immunity to disturbances.
● The torque is to be controlled over a control range greater than 1:10
● A defined and/or a changing torque has to be maintained for speeds below approx. 10 %
of the rated motor frequency P0310.
When it comes to entering a setpoint, the Vector control (see table below) is sub-divided into:
● Closed-loop speed control, and
● Closed-loop torque/current control (known as: Closed-loop torque control).
Table 6- 43 Vector control versions
Vector control (closed-loop) Without encoder With encoder
Closed-loop speed control P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 0 P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 0
P1300 = 22 or P1300 = 23 or Closed-loop torque control
P1300 = 20 and P1501 = 1 P1300 = 21 and P1501 = 1
When closed-loop speed control is used, the closed-loop torque control is secondary. This
type of cascaded closed-loop control has proven itself in practice regarding commissioning
and increased transparency.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
124 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.3.1 Vector Control without Speed Encoder
Data
Parameter range: P1400 … P1780
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7000
Description
When Vector control is used without a speed encoder (SLVC) then the position of the flux
and the actual frequency must be determined using the motor model.
CAUTION
If, for example, due to an overload of the motor the inverter loses orientation. It will not be
possible to switch off using an OFF1 or an OFF3 command. In this case it is necessary to
initiate an OFF2 command or disable the pulses using P0054.3.
In this case, the model is supported by the accessible currents and voltages. At low
frequencies (≈ 0 Hz), the model is not able to determine the speed. Inability of the model to
determine the speed at ≈ 0 Hz, uncertainty in model parameters and measurement
inaccuracy are the reasons why there is a changeover from closed-loop to open-loop
controlled operation in this range.
The changeover between closed-loop controlled and open-loop controlled operation is
controlled using the time and frequency conditions (P1755, P1756, P1758) (see figures
below). The system does not wait for the time condition, if the setpoint frequency at the
ramp-function generator input and the actual frequency simultaneously lie below fopen loop.
3>@
>@
I
RSHQORRS
3>+]@
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 125
Example for fset < 0,5 x fopen loop and fact > fopen loop
I
DFW
W
W
I
FORVHGORRS
I
RSHQORRS
I
RSHQORRS
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS
3>+]@
I
VHW
Figure 6-38 Changeover condition during ramp down for SLVC
Coming form open loop control, the control mode changes to closed loop control depending
on the time and frequency condition (P1755, P1756, P1759, see figure below). The time set
in P1759 will be ignored if the actual frequency exceeds the value of P1755.
Example for fset > fclosed loop and fact < fopen loop
3
I
DFW
W
W
I
FORVHGORRS
I
VHW
I
RSHQORRS
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS
3>+]@
Figure 6-39 Changeover condition during ramp up for SLVC
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
126 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Example for changeover condition during ramp up to a negative setpoint: |fset| > 0,5 x fopen
loop
3 3
IDFW
W
W
IFORVHGORRS
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
IFORVHGORRS
IRSHQORRS
IRSHQORRS
U
6/9&RSHQORRS
U
6/9&FORVHGORRS
3>+]@
3>+]@
Figure 6-40 Changeover condition during ramp down to negative setpoint for SLVC
Note
In the open-loop controlled mode, the speed actual value is the same as the setpoint. For
suspended loads or when accelerating, parameter P1610 (constant torque boost) and P1611
(torque boost when accelerating) must be modified in order to allow the motor to provide the
steady-state and/or dynamic load torque. If P1610 is set to 0 %, then only the magnetizing
current r0331 is impressed for a value of 100 % of the rated motor current P0305. In order
that the motor does not stall when accelerating, P1611 can be increased or the acceleration
pre-control can be used for the speed controller. This is also practical in order that the motor
is not thermally overloaded at low speeds.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 127
For Vector control without speed actual value encoder the inverter has, in the low frequency
range, the following outstanding features with respect to other AC inverters:
● Closed-loop controlled operation down to ≈ 1 Hz
● Can start in the closed-loop controlled mode (immediately after the motor has been
energized)
● The low frequency range (0 Hz) is passed-through in closed-loop controlled operation.
I
W
3
I
W
3
3
6WDUW
&ORVHGORRS &ORVHGORRS
=HURFURVVLQJ
2SHQORRS 2SHQORRS
Figure 6-41 Starting and passing through 0 Hz in closed-loop control
The following advantages are obtained as a result of closed-loop controlled operation down
to approx. 1 Hz (this can be selected using parameter P1755) as well as the possibility to
immediately start closed-loop controlled at 0 Hz or to reverse closed-loop controlled (this can
be set using parameter P1750):
● No changeover operation is required within the closed-loop control (smooth behavior –no
frequency dips)
● Continuous closed-loop speed-torque control is possible down to approx. 1 Hz.
Note
For closed-loop controlled reversing or closed-loop controlled starting from 0 Hz it must
be taken into account that when staying too long (> 2 s or > P1758) in the range around
0 Hz, that the closed-loop control automatically changes over from closed-loop into the
open-loop controlled mode.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
128 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Table 6- 44 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1400 = … Configuration of speed control
Bit 0: Automatic Kp adaption
Bit 1: Integral freeze (SLVC)
P1442 = … Filter time for actual speed
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1452 = … Filter time for actual speed (SLVC)
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1488 = … Droop input source
0: Droop disabled
1: Torque setpoint
2: Speed controller output
3: Speed controller integral output
P1492 = … Enable droop
possible sources: 722.x (digital input) / 2033.11 (option port) / 2091.11 (serial interface)
P1496 = … Scaling accel. precontrol
0 ... 400 %, default 0 %
P1499 = … Scaling accel. Torque control
0 ... 400 %, default 100 %
P1500 = … Selection of torque setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
5: Analog setpoint 2
...
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
P1501 = … Change to torque control
Selects command source from which it is possible to change between speed and torque
control
P1503 = … Torque setpoint
Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control
P1530 = … Motoring power limitation
0 ... 8000 N, default 0.75 N: Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power
(motoring power limitaton)
P1531 = … Regenerative power limitation
-8000 ... 0 N, default -0.75 N: Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active
power (regenerative power limitation)
P1750 = … Control word of motor model
Bit 00: Start SLVC open loop
Bit 01: Zero crossing SLVC open loop
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 129
Table 6- 45 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1470 = … Gain speed controller (SLVC)
0 ... 2000, default 3
P1472 = … Integral time n-ctrl. (SLVC)
25 ... 32001 s, default 400 s
P1477 = … Set integrator of n-ctrl
Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting
P1478 = … Set integrator value n-ctrl
Selects source for integral part of speed controller
P1489 = … Droop scaling
0 ... 0.5 %, default 0.05 %
P1511 = … Additional torque setpoint
Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control
P1520 = … Upper torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
P1521 = … Lower torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
P1522 = … Upper torque limit
Selects source of upper torque limitation: default 1520
P1523 = … Lower torque limit
Selects source of lower torque limitation: default 1521
P1525 = … Scaling lower torque limit
-400 ... 400 %, default 100 %
P1570 = … Fixed value flux setpoint
50 ... 200 %, default 100 %: Defines fixed value of setpoint relative to rated motor flux
P1574 = … Dynamic voltage headroom
0 ... 150 V, default 10 V
P1580 = … Efficiency optimization
0 ... 100 %, default 0 %: Enters degree of efficiency optimization
P1582 = … Smooth time for flux setpoint
4 ... 500 s, default 15 s
P1596 = … Int. Time field weak. controller
20 ... 32001 s, default 50 s
P1610 = … Continuous torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200 %, default 50 %: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1611 = … Acc. Torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200 %, default 0 %: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1654 = … Smooth time for lsq setpoint
2 ... 20 s, default 6 s
P1715 = … Gain current controller
0 ... 5, default 0.25
P1717 = … Integral time current controller
1 ... 50 s, defualt 4.1 s
P1740 = … Gain for oscillation damping
0 ... 10, default 0
P1745 = … Flux variance limit in stall
0 ... 1000 %, default 5 %
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
130 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P1755 = … Start-freq. Motor model (SLVC)
0.1 ... 250 Hz, default 5 Hz: Enters start frequency of sensoreless vector control
P1756 = … Hyst.-freq. Motor model (SLVC)
10 ... 100 %, default 50 %: Hysteresis frequency in percent of start-frequency (P1755)
P1758 = … T (wait) transit to feed-fwd-mode
100 ... 2000 ms, default 1500 ms: Sets waiting time for chance from closed-loop to open-loop
control mode.
P1759 = … T(wait) transit to closed loop
0 … 2000 ms, default 0 ms: sets waiting time for change from open-loop to closed-loop control
mode.
P1764 = … Kp of n-adaption (SLVC)
0 ... 2.5, default 0.2
P1767 = … Tn of n-adaption (SLVC)
1 ... 200 s, default 4 s: Enters speed adaption controller integral time
P1780 = … Control word of Rs/Rr-adaption
Bit 00: Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt.
Bit 01: Enable observer Rs-adapt.
Bit 02: Enable observer Xm-adapt.
Output value
Parameter Description
r1407 Status 2 of motor control
Bit 00: V/f control enabled
Bit 01: SLVC enabled
Bit 02: Torque ccontrol enabled
Bit 05: Stop l-comp. Speed control
Bit 06: Set l-comp. Speed controller
Bit 08: Upper torque limit active
Bit 09: Lower torque limit active
Bit 10: Droop active
Bit 15: DDS change active
r1438 Freq. Setpoint to controller
r1445 Actual filtered frequency
r1482 Integral output of n-ctrl
r1490 Droop frequency
r1508 Torque setpoint
r1515 Additional torque setpoint
r1518 Acceleration torque
r1526 Upper torque limitation
r1527 Lower torque limitation
r1536 Max. trq. Motoring current
r1537 Max. trq. Regenerative current
r1538 Upper torque limit (total)
r1539 Lower torque limit (total)
r1583 Flux setpoint (smoothed)
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 131
Parameter Description
r1597 Output field weak . controller
r1598 Flux setpoint (total)
r1718 Output of lsq controller
r1719 Integral output of lsq ctrl.
r1723 Output of lsd controller
r1724 Integral output of lsd ctrl.
r1725 Integral limit of lsd ctrl.
r1728 Decoupling voltage
r1746 Actual flux variance
r1751 Status word of motor model
Bit 00: Transit to SLVC open loop
Bit 01: N-adaption enabled
Bit 02: Transit to SLVC closed loop
Bit 03: Speed controller enabled
Bit 04: Current injection
Bit 05: Start flux decrease
Bit 14: Rs adapted
Bit 15: Xh adapted
r1770 Prop. Output of n-adaption
r1771 Int. Output of n-adaption
r1778 Flux angle difference
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
132 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.3.2 Vector control with speed encoder
Data
P1400 … P1740 Parameter range:
P0400 … P0494
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7000
Description
For Vector control with speed encoder (VC), a pulse encoder, e.g. an encoder with 1024
pulses per revolution is required. In addition to the correct wiring, the pulse encoder must be
activated, corresponding to the encoder type, using the parameter range P0400 … P0494.
Note
Even when using speed control with encoder it may be necessary to adapt the calculations
of the motor model using the integral and proportional part of speed adaptation
(r1770/r1771). The limits can be adjusted via P1752 and P1756:
Whereby:
No speed adaption if r0066 (Output Frequency) < P1752 *(P1756 %/100 %)
Speed adaption via ramp function if
P1752 *(P1756 %/100 %) < r0066 (Output Frequency) < P1752
Full speed adaption if P1752 < r0066 (Output Frequency)
33 +]
3 3>+]@
3>@
3 3>+]@
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 133
P0400 = 2 A
B
A
AN
B
BN
3DUDPHWHU 7HUPLQDO 7UDFN (QFRGHURXWSXW
VLQJOHHQGHG
GLIIHUHQWLDO
Figure 6-42 P0400 settings for a pulse encoder
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
134 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Advantages of Vector control with encoder:
● The speed can be closed-loop controlled down to 0 Hz (e.g. at standstill)
● Stable control behavior over the complete speed range
● Constant torque in the rated speed range
● When compared to closed-loop speed control without encoder, the dynamic response for
motors with encoder is significantly higher as the speed is directly measured and is
incorporated in generating the model of current components id, iq.
Input values
Table 6- 46 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0400 = … Select encoder type
0: Disabled (default)
2: Quadrature encoder without zero pulse
12: Quadrature encoder with zero pulse
P0405 = … Enables selection of various pulse types
Bit 04: Invert Z-pulse
Bit 05: Z-pulse = Z-pulse & A-pulse & B-pulse
P0408 = … Encoder pulses per revolution
2 ... 20000, default 1024
P0410 = … Reverses internal direction sense
0: Encoder Normal Rotation
1: Encoder Reverse Rotation
P0491 = … Reaction on speed signal loss
0: Trip the drive
1: Warn and switch to SLVC if in SVC
P0492 = … Allowed speed difference
0 ... 100%, default 10%: Used for low and high speed encoder loss detection
P0494 = … Delay speed loss reaction
0 ... 65000 s, default 10 s: Selects the delay between loss of encoder at low speed and
reaction to the encoder loss
P1400 = … Configuration of speed control
Bit 0: Automatic Kp adaption
Bit 1: Integral freeze (SLVC)
P1442 = … Filter time for actual speed
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1452 = … Filter time for actual speed (SLVC)
0 ... 32000 s, default: 2 s
P1488 = … Droop input source
0: Droop disabled
1: Torque setpoint
2: Speed controller output
3: Speed controller integral output
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 135
Parameter Description Setting
P1492 = … Enable droop
possible sources: 722.x (digital input) / 2033.11 (option port) / 2091.11 (serial interface)
P1496 = … Scaling accel. precontrol
0 ... 400%, default 0%
P1499 = … Scaling accel. Torque control
0 ... 400%, default 100%
P1500 = … Selection of torque setpoint
0: No Main setpoint
2: Analog setpoint
4: USS on RS232
5: Analog setpoint 2
...
77: Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
P1501 = … Change to torque control
Selects command source from which it is possible to change between speed and torque
control
P1503 = … Torque setpoint
Selects source of torque setpoint for torque control
P1530 = … Motoring power limitation
0 ... 8000 N, default 0.75 N: Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power
(motoring power limitaton)
P1531 = … Regenerative power limitation
-8000 ... 0 N, default -0.75 N: Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active
power (regenerative power limitation)
Table 6- 47 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1460 = … Gain speed controller
0 ... 2000, default: 3
P1462 = … Integral time speed controller
25 ... 32001 s, default: 400 s
P1477 = … Set integrator of n-ctrl
Selects command source for enabling of integrator setting
P1478 = … Set integrator value n-ctrl
Selects source for integral part of speed controller
P1489 = … Droop scaling
0 ... 0.5%, default 0.05%
P1511 = … Additional torque setpoint
Selects source of additional torque setpoint for torque and speed control
P1520 = … Upper torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
P1521 = … Lower torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
P1522 = … Upper torque limit
Selects source of upper torque limitation: default 1520
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
136 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P1523 = … Lower torque limit
Selects source of lower torque limitation: default 1521
P1525 = … Scaling lower torque limit
-400 ... 400%, default 100%
P1570 = … Fixed value flux setpoint
50 ... 200%, default 100%: Defines fixed value of setpoint relative to rated motor flux
P1574 = … Dynamic voltage headroom
0 ... 150 V, default 10 V
P1580 = … Efficiency optimization
0 ... 100%, default 0%: Enters degree of efficiency optimization
P1582 = … Smooth time for flux setpoint
4 ... 500 s, default 15 s
P1596 = … Int. Time field weak. controller
20 ... 32001 s, default 50 s
P1610 = … Continuous torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200%, default 50%: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1611 = … Acc. Torque boost (SLVC)
0 ... 200%, default 0%: Value relative to rated motor torque r0333
P1654 = … Smooth time for lsq setpoint
2 ... 20 s, default 6 s
P1715 = … Gain current controller
0 ... 5, default 0.25
P1717 = … Integral time current controller
1 ... 50 s, defualt 4.1 s
P1740 = … Gain for oscillation damping
0 ... 10, default 0
P1752= … Start frequency of the n adaption in vector control with encoder
0.1 ... 250 Hz, default 5 Hz
P1756 Activation/deactivation of speed adaption in vector control with encoder
10 ... 100 %, default 50 %
Output value
Parameter Description
r0403 Encoder Status word
Bit 00: Encoder module active
Bit 01: Encoder error
Bit 02: Signal o.k.
Bit 03: Encoder Low Speed Loss
Bit 04: Speed Measurement using one encoder pulse edge
r1438 Freq. Setpoint to controller
r1445 Actual filtered frequency
r1482 Integral output of n-ctrl
r1490 Droop frequency
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 137
Parameter Description
r1508 Torque setpoint
r1515 Additional torque setpoint
r1518 Acceleration torque
r1526 Upper torque limitation
r1527 Lower torque limitation
r1536 Max. trq. Motoring current
r1537 Max. trq. Regenerative current
r1538 Upper torque limit (total)
r1539 Lower torque limit (total)
r1583 Flux setpoint (smoothed)
r1597 Output field weak . controller
r1598 Flux setpoint (total)
r1718 Output of lsq controller
r1719 Integral output of lsq ctrl.
r1723 Output of lsd controller
r1724 Integral output of lsd ctrl.
r1725 Integral limit of lsd ctrl.
r1728 Decoupling voltage
r1770 Prop. output of n-adaption
r1771 Int. output of n-adaption
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
138 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
6.10.3.3 Speed controller
Data
P1300, P1400 … P1780
SLVC: P1470, P1472, P1452
Parameter range:
VC: P1460, P1462, P1442
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7500, FP7510
Description
Both of the control techniques (SLVC and VC) have the same speed controller structure
which includes the following components:
● PI controller
● Speed controller pre-control
● Droop
The sum of the output quantities forms the speed setpoint, which is reduced to the
permissible level using the torque setpoint limiting function.
Speed controller (SLVC: P1470, P1472, P1452 VC: P1460, P1462, P1442)
The speed controller (see figure below) receives its setpoint r0062 from the setpoint channel,
the actual value r0063 either directly from the speed actual value encoder for VC or through
the motor model for SLVC. The system error is amplified by the PI controller and, together
with the pre-control, forms the torque setpoint.
For increasing load torques, when the droop function is active, the speed setpoint is
proportionally reduced so that the load on an individual motor within a group (where two or
several motors are mechanically coupled) is reduced when excessively high torques occur.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 139
ದ
ದ
U
U
U
U
7L
.S
7
Q
U
U
U
U
U
U
7
L
.
S
7
Q
6/9& 3 3 3
9& 3 3 3
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
6SHHGFRQWURO
$FWIUHTXHQF\
)UHTVHWSRLQW
3UHFRQWURO
'URRS
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
3,
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
Figure 6-43 Speed controller
If the moment of inertia was entered, the speed controller (Kp,Tn) can be calculated using the
automatic parameterization (P0340 = 4). The controller parameters are defined according to
the symmetrical optimum as follows:
Tn = 4 * Tσ
Kp = ｽ * r0345 / Tσ = 2 * r0345 / Tn
Tσ = sum of the low delay times
If oscillations occur with these particular settings, then the speed controller gain Kp should be
manually reduced. It is also possible to increase the speed actual value smoothing (this is
the usual procedure for gearbox play or high-frequency torsional oscillations) and then re-call
the controller calculation as the value is incorporated in the computation of Kp and Tn.
The following interrelationships apply for the optimization routine:
● If Kp is increased then the controller becomes faster and the overshoot is reduced.
However, the signal ripple and oscillations in the speed controller loop are increased.
● If Tn is reduced, then the controller also becomes faster. However, the overshoot
increases.
When manually adjusting the speed control, the simplest procedure is to initially define the
possible dynamic response using Kp (and the speed actual value smoothing) in order to then
reduce the integral action time as far as possible. In this case it is important to ensure that
the closed-loop control must also remain stable in the field-weakening range.
When oscillations occur in the closed-loop speed control, it is generally sufficient to increase
the smoothing time in P1452 for SLVC or P1442 for VC (or to reduce the controller gain) in
order to dampen oscillations.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
140 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored using r1482 and the unlimited
controller output can be monitored using r1508 (torque setpoint).
Note
When compared to closed-loop control with encoder, the dynamic response for sensorless
motors is significantly reduced. This is because the speed can only be derived from the
inverter output quantities for current and voltage which have the appropriate noise level.
Speed controller pre-control (P1496, P0341, P0342)
The control behavior of the speed control loop can be improved if the speed controller of the
inverter also generates values for the current setpoints (corresponds to the torque setpoint)
from the speed setpoint. The torque setpoint mv, is calculated as follows:
PY 3
ˆ
Gω
VHW 333
Gω
VHW
GW GW
This is entered into the current controller through an adaptation element directly as an
additive control quantity (this is enabled using P1496).
The motor moment of inertia P0341 is directly calculated during the quick commissioning or
the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1). The factor P0342 between the total moment of
inertia and motor moment of inertia must be manually determined.
33
3
U
ಥ
ಥ
U U
U U
U
!
7
L.
S7
Q
6/9& 3 3 3
9& 3 3 3
.S7Q
7L
'URRS
)UHTVHWSRLQW
3UHFRQWURO
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
3,
6SHHG
&RQWUROOHU
$FWIUHTXHQF\
Figure 6-44 Speed controller with pre-control
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 141
When correctly adapted, the speed controller only has to correct noise
quantities/disturbances in its control loop and this is achieved with a relatively low
manipulated quantity change. On the other hand, speed setpoint changes bypass the speed
controller and are therefore executed faster.
The effect of the pre-control quantity can be adapted, depending on the particular
application, using the pre-control factor P1496. Using P1496 = 100 %, the pre-control is
calculated according to the motor and load moment of inertia (P0341, P0342). In order that
the speed controller does not work against the torque setpoint which is entered, a balancing
filter is automatically used. The time constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the
equivalent delay time of the speed control loop. The speed controller pre-control is correctly
set (P1496 = 100 %, calibrated using P0342), if the I component of the speed controller
(r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or ramp-down in the range n > 20 % * P0310.
This means, using the pre-control, it is possible to approach a new speed setpoint without
overshoot (prerequisite: The torque limiting does not intervene and the moment of inertia
remains constant).
If the speed controller is pre-controlled, then the speed setpoint (r0062) is delayed with the
same smoothing (P1442 or P1452) as the actual value (r1445). This ensures that when
accelerating, there is no setpoint – actual value difference (r0064) at the controller input
which would have been exclusively caused by the signal propagation time.
When the speed pre-control is activated, it must be ensured that the speed setpoint is
continuously entered and without any significant noise level (avoid torque surges). An
appropriate signal can be generated by smoothing the analog signal P0753 or by activating
the rounding-off function of the ramp-function generator P1130 to P1133.
Note
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (P1120, P1121) of the ramp-function generator in the
setpoint channel should only be set so fast that when accelerating and braking, the motor
speed can follow the setpoint. This then guarantees the optimum functioning of the speed
controller pre-control.
The starting time r0345 is a measure for the overall moment of inertia of the machine and
describes that time in which the unloaded motor can accelerate from standstill to the rated
motor speed P0311 with the rated motor torque r0333.
U
3
33
0
Q
7U
UDWHG0RW
UDWHG0RW
VWDUWLQJ
ຘ
ຘ˭ຘ
ຘຘ
ຘ
ຘ˭ຘ
ຘˆ
If these secondary conditions match the particular application, then the starting time can be
used as the shortest value for the ramp-up and ramp-down times.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
142 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Droop (P1488 … P1492)
The droop (enabled using P1488) means that with increasing load torque, the speed setpoint
is proportionally reduced.
ದ
ದ
7
L.
S7
Q
6/9& 3 3 3
9& 3 3 3
U
U
3
3
3
U
U
U
U U
U
PV
7L
.S7Q
'URRS
)UHTVHWSRLQW
3UHFRQWURO
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
3,
6SHHG
&RQWUROOHU
$FWIUHTXHQF\
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
RQO\DFWLYHZLWK6/9&
Figure 6-45 Speed controller with droop
Droop is the simplest method to implement load sharing control. However, this load sharing
control can only be used if the motors are operated more or less under steady-state
conditions (e.g. at constant speed). For motors, which are frequently accelerated and braked
with high speed changes, this technique is only conditionally suitable.
The most simple load sharing control is, e.g., used for applications where two or several
motors are mechanically coupled or operate on a common shaft and which have to fulfill the
requirements above. In this case, the droop controls torsional stressing associated with the
mechanical coupling by changing the speeds of the individual motors (excessive torques are
reduced for an individual motor).
Prerequisite
● All of the motors must be operated with closed-loop Vector speed control (with or without
speed actual value encoder)
● The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator must be identical for
all of the motors.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 143
6.10.3.4 Closed-loop torque control
Data
P1300, P1500 … P1511 Parameter range:
P1400 … P1780
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7200, FP7210, FP7700, FP7710
Description
For sensorless closed-loop speed control SLVC (P1300 = 20) or for closed-loop speed
control with sensor VC (P1300 = 21), it is possible to changeover to closed-loop torque
control (slave motor) using BICO parameter P1501. It is not possible to changeover between
closed-loop speed and torque control if the closed-loop torque control is directly selected
using P1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and supplementary torque setpoint can be
selected using parameter P1500 and also using BICO parameter P1503 (CI: Torque
setpoint) or P1511 (CI: Supplementary torque setpoint). The supplementary torque acts both
for the closed-loop torque control as well as for the closed-loop speed control (see figure
below). As a result of this feature, a pre-control torque for the speed control can be
implemented using the supplementary torque setpoint.
Note
For safety reasons, it is presently not possible to assign fixed torque setpoints.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
144 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
.
3
7
Q
ಥ
ಥ
7
L
3&
3&
3&
7
L
.
3
7
Q
6/9&
9&
3 3 3
3
3
3
U
U U
U
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO
)UHTVHWSRLQW
$FWIUHTXHQF\
&,7RUTXHVHWSRLQW
%,යWRUTXHFWUO
&,$GGWUTVHWS
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
7RUTXH
VHSRLQW
3,
VSHHG
FRQWUROOHU
Figure 6-46 Closed-loop speed and torque control
The sum of both torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the torque setpoint of the
speed control. Above the maximum speed (plus 3%), a speed limiting controller reduces the
torque limits in order to prevent the motor accelerating any further.
A "real" closed-loop torque control (with automatically set speed) is only possible in the
closed-loop controlled range but not in the open-loop controlled range. In the open-loop
controlled range, the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed through a ramp-up
integrator (integration time ~ P1499 * P0341 * P0342). This is the reason that sensorless
closed-loop torque control in the area around standstill (0 speed) is only suitable for
applications which require an accelerating torque and not a load torque (e.g. traversing
motors). For closed-loop torque control with sensors, this restriction does not apply.
If the closed-loop torque control is active, and a fast stop command (OFF3) is output, then
the system automatically changes-over to closed-loop speed control and braking of the
motor is started. If a normal stop command (OFF1) is output, there is no changeover.
Instead, the system waits until a higher-level control has brought the motor to a standstill, in
order to inhibit the pulses. This is necessary in order to allow the master and slave motors to
be shut down together. For P1300 = 22 or 23, for OFF1, the motor is directly powered-down
(as for OFF2).
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 145
6.10.3.5 Closed-loop torque control (SLVC)
Description
P1300, P1500 … P1511 Parameter range:
P1400 … P1780
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7200, FP7700
For sensorless closed-loop speed control (P1300 = 20) it is possible to changeover to
closed-loop torque control (slave motor) using BICO parameter P1501. It is not possible to
changeover between closed-loop speed and torque control if the closed-loop torque control
is directly selected using P1300 = 22. The torque setpoint and supplementary torque
setpoint can be selected using parameter P1500 and also using BICO parameter P1503 (CI:
Torque setpoint) or P1511 (CI: Supplementary torque setpoint). The supplementary torque
acts both for the closed-loop torque control as well as for the closed-loop speed control (see
figure below). As a result of this feature, a pre-control torque for the speed control can be
implemented using the supplementary torque setpoint.
Note
For safety reasons, it is presently not possible to assign fixed torque setpoints.
3 3
ಥ
ಥ
3
3&
3&
3&
U
U U
U
'URRS
3UHFRQWURO
)UHTVHWSRLQW
$FWIUHTXHQF\
&,7RUTXHVHWSRLQW
%,යWRUTXHFWUO
&,$GGWUTVHWS
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROLVHQDEOHG3!
7RUTXH
VHSRLQW
3,
VSHHG
FRQWUROOHU
Figure 6-47 Closed-loop speed and torque control
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
146 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The sum of both torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the torque setpoint of the
speed control. Above the maximum speed (plus 3%), a speed limiting controller reduces the
torque limits in order to prevent the motor accelerating any further.
A "real" closed-loop torque control (with automatically set speed) is only possible in the
closed-loop controlled range but not in the open-loop controlled range. In the open-loop
controlled range, the torque setpoint changes the setpoint speed through a ramp-up
integrator (integration time ~ P1499 * P0341 * P0342). This is the reason that sensorless
closed-loop torque control in the area around standstill (0 speed) is only suitable for
applications which require an accelerating torque and not a load torque (e.g. traversing
motors).
If the closed-loop torque control is active, and a fast stop command (OFF3) is output, then
the system automatically changes-over to closed-loop speed control and braking of the
motor is started. If a normal stop command (OFF1) is output, there is no changeover.
Instead, the system waits until a higher-level control has brought the motor to a standstill, in
order to inhibit the pulses. This is necessary in order to allow the master and slave motors to
be shut down together. For P1300 = 22, for OFF1, the motor is directly powered-down (as for
OFF2).
CAUTION
If, for example, due to an overload of the motor the inverter loses orientation. It will not be
possible to switch off using an OFF1 or an OFF3 command. In this case it is necessary to
initiate an OFF2 command or disable the pulses using P0054.3.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 147
6.10.3.6 Switch-over from Frequency to Torque Control
Data
Parameter range: P1300, P1501
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
CAUTION
Don't use SS1 or SLS in conjunction with torque control
Torque control should not be used in conjunction with the fail-safe functions SS1 and SLS,
because the speed ramp functions, necessary for SS1 and SLS are not available together
with the torque control. So, if activating SS1 or SLS in case of torque control, a passivated
STO will be generated immediately (after the time, calculated in section "Limiting values for
SS1 and SLS" has been passed) if the output frequency exceeds the safety envelope.
The STO can be used with torque control without any restrictions.
The torque control is switched-on via parameter P1501 during operation or selected with
parameter P1300 = 22, 23.
Table 6- 48 Torque control
Control mode P1501 = ON
P1300 = 20, 21 OFF1 command is not recognized. Closed-loop
speed control + fail-safe functions SLS, SS1 A safety fault is generated when the output
frequency leaves the safety envelope.
P1300 = 22, 23 OFF1 command recognized as OFF2. Torque control
+ fail-safe functions SLS, SS1 A safety fault is generated when the output
frequency leaves the safety envelope.
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
148 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Table 6- 49 Main function parameters
Parameter Description (Parameter name and factory setting (if not variable) in bold) Setting
P1300 = … Control mode
0: V/f with linear characteristic (default)
1: V/f with FCC
2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
3: V/f with programmable characteristic
4: reserved
5: V/f for textile applications
6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Sensorless vector control
21: Vector control with sensor
22: Sensorless vector torque-control
23: Vector torque-control with sensor
P1501 = … Change to torque control
Selects command source from which it is possible to change between speed and torque
control
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 149
6.10.3.7 Limiting the torque setpoint
Data
P1520 … P1531
P0640, r0067
Parameter range:
r1407 bit 08, r1407 bit 09
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP7700, FP7710 (CU240S)
Description
All of the following limits act on the torque setpoint which is either entered at the speed
controller output for closed-loop speed control or as torque input for closed-loop torque
control. The minimum is used from the various limits. This minimum is cyclically computed in
the inverter and displayed in parameters r1538, r1539.
● r1538 Upper torque limit
● r1539 Lower torque limit
This means that these cyclic values limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller
output/torque input and indicate the instantaneously maximum possible torque. If the torque
setpoint is limited in the inverter, then this is displayed using the following diagnostic
parameters
● r1407 bit 08 Upper torque limit active
● r1407 bit 09 Lower torque limit active
Torque limiting
The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits are
parametrizable for motoring and regenerative operation.
● P1520 CO: Upper torque limit value
● P1521 CO: Lower torque limit value
● P1522 CI: Upper torque limit value
● P1523 CI: Lower torque limit value
● P1525 Scaling, lower torque limit value
The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters:
● r1526 CO: Upper torque limit value
● r1527 CO: Lower torque limit value
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
150 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
U
U
3
3
I
VWDOO
_I
DFW
_
_0_
aಧ
Iaಧ
I
3RZHU
OLPLWDWLRQ
6WDOO
OLPLWDWLRQ 7RUTXH
OLPLWDWLRQ
&RQVWDQW
SRZHU
6WDOO
SRZHU
&RQVWDQW
WRUTXH
Figure 6-48 Torque limits
Power limits
This value specifies the maximum permissible power, whereby different limits can be
parameterized for motoring and regenerative operation.
● P1530 Motor power limit
● P1531 Regenerative power limit
Stall limiting
The stall limiting (locked rotor limiting) is internally calculated for the drive from the motor
data.
Current limiting
The current limiting additionally limits the maximum torque which the motor can provide. If
the torque limit is increased, more torque is only available if a higher current can flow. It may
be necessary to also adapt the current limit. The current limiting is influenced by:
● P0640
● Thermal motor protection
● Thermal inverter protection
After limiting, the instantaneous maximum possible inverter current is displayed in parameter
r0067 (limited output current).
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 151
Input values
Table 6- 50 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0640 = … Motor overload factor [%]
10 ... 400 %, default 200 %: Defines motor overload current limit relative to rated motor current
(P0305)
P1530 = … Motoring power limitation
0 ... 8000 N, default 0.75 N: Defines fixed value for the max. permissible motoring active power
(motoring power limitaton)
P1531 = … Regenerative power limitation
-8000 ... 0 N, default -0.75 N: Enters fixed value for the max. permissible regenerative active
power (regenerative power limitation)
Table 6- 51 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1520 = … Upper torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default 5.13 Nm
P1521 = … Lower torque limit
-99999 ... 99999 Nm, default -5.13 Nm
P1522 = … Upper torque limit
Selects source of upper torque limitation: default 1520
P1523 = … Lower torque limit
Selects source of lower torque limitation: default 1521
P1525 = … Scaling lower torque limit
-400 ... 400 %, default 100 %
Output value
r0067 Act. Output current limit
r1407 bit 8 Status 2 of motor control - Upper torque limit active
r1407 bit 9 Status 2 of motor control - Lower torque limit active
Common Inverter Functions
6.10 Control Functions
Frequency converter
152 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 153
Functions only available with G120 inverters 7
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Data
Parameter range: P0727
P0701 … P0713
P0840, P0842, P1113
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
2-/3-wire control allows to start, stop and reverse the inverter in one of the following ways:
1. 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals
2. 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals
3. 2-wire control
using ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals
4. 3-wire control
using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses
5. 3 wire control
using OFF1/HOLD and REV as permanent signal, ON as pulse signal
The different types of 2-/3-wire control have to be established via P0727. A detailed
description is given in the following section. The signal source can be set via the parameters
P0840, P0842 and P1113.
Note
Automatic restart function
When a 2-/3-wire control methods is selected via P0727, the automatic restart function
(P1210) is disabled. If the automatic restarted function is required, the user must specifically
enable this function. For further details, please see the Parameter Manual.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
154 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the values 1, 2 and 12 for the
digital inputs (P0701 … and P0712, P0713 for AI used as DI) are redefined as shown in the
table below.
Table 7- 1 Redefined values of digital inputs
P0727 = 0
Siemens Standard
P0727 = 1
2-wire control
P0727 = 2
3-wire control
P0727 = 3
3-wire control
Value 1 of digital input
meaning of P0840
ON/OFF1 ON_FWD STOP ON_PULSE
Value 2 of digital input
meaning of P0842
ON_REV/OFF1 ON_REV FWDP OFF1/HOLD
Value 3 of digital input
meaning of P1113
REV REV REVP REV
"P" denotes "Pulse"; "FWD" denotes "Forward"; "REV" denotes "Reverse"
Command sources for 2-/3-wire control
To use the 2-/3-wire control the sources for ON/OFF1 (P0840), ON_REV/OFF1 (P0842) and
REV (P1113) respective the redefined values have to be set accordingly.
Input values
Table 7- 2 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P0727 = … Selection of 2/3-wire method
0: Siemens (start/dir) - (Method 1 and Method 2)
1: 2-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 3)
2: 3-wire (fwd/rev) - (Method 4)
3: 3-wire (start/dir) - (Method 5)
P0840 = … ON/OFF1 command source
possible sources: 722.0 (DI0) default, or any binary output parameter (BO).
P0842 = … ON reverse/OFF1 command source
possible sources: 722.x (DIx), or any binary output parameter (BO).
P1113 = … REV command source
possible sources: 722.1 (DI1) default, or any binary output parameter (BO).
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 155
7.1.1 Siemens standard control (P0727 = 0)
Description
With the default settings (P0727 = 0) the following variants of 2-wire control are available:
1. ON/OFF1 and REV.
2. ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1.
ON/OFF1 and REV
This method allows the inverter to be started and stopped using the ON/OFF1 command and
the direction of the inverter changed using the REV command. These commands can be
assigned to any of the digital inputs through parameters P0701 … P0709 (and P0712,
P0713 for AI used as DI) or BICO connections.
The REV commands can be given at any time, independent of the frequency output of the
inverter.
Function
On receiving an ON/OFF1 command the inverter will run the motor in a forward direction and
ramp-up the motor to the frequency setpoint.
When a REV command is issued, the inverter will ramp-down the frequency through 0 Hz
and run the motor in the reverse direction. When the REV command is removed the inverter
will ramp-up through 0 Hz and run in a forward direction until the frequency setpoint is reach.
When the ON/OFF1 command is removed, the inverter will stop the motor by performing an
OFF1.
The REV command initiated by itself cannot start the motor.
R
R
IRXW
212))
2))
7LPH
$FWLYH
$FWLYH $FWLYH
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
5(9
Figure 7-1 Siemens standard control using ON/OFF1 and REV
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
156 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1
This method allows the inverter to run the motor in a forward direction (run right) using the
ON/OFF1 command and in the opposite direction (run left) using the ON_REV/OFF1.
However, for a direction reversal the drive will first have to decelerate with OFF1 and when
reaching 0 Hz the reverse signal can be applied.
Function
The ramp down phase can be interrupted by start command in the same direction: if the
drive was operating in forward and OFF1 was applied, an ON/OFF1 will work correctly and
accelerate again the drive up to the setpoint speed. The same is valid for reverse and
ON_REV/OFF1
Giving a start command for the opposite direction of which the inverter frequency output is
ramping down, the drive ignores the new setting and the drive will ramp down to 0 Hz and
then remain at standstill.
Without any control signal enabled the drive will ramp down to a stop and remain at
standstill.
R
R
R
R
IRXW
$FW
212))
21B5(92))
2))
7LPH
$FWLYH
$FWLYH
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 7-2 Siemens standard control using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1
2-wire control using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals
(P0727 = 0, Siemens standard)
ON/OFF1 REV Function
0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
0 1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 157
2-wire control using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals
(P0727 = 0, Siemens standard)
ON/OFF1 ON_REV/
OFF1
Function
0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency (a signal,
set while the inverter ramps down, will be ignored)
0 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 First active signal has priority, second signal is ignored
7.1.2 2-wire control (P0727 = 1)
Description
This method uses two permanent signals, ON_FWD and ON_REV which start/stop the
inverter and determine the direction of the motor.
The advantage of this method of control is that ON_FWD and ON_REV can be switched at
any time, independently of the setpoint or frequency output or direction of rotation, and there
is no requirement of the motor to ramp-down to 0 Hz before the command is performed.
Function
With a permanent ON_FWD signal, the drive is ON and runs in forward direction.
With a permanent ON_REV signal, the drive is ON and runs in reverse direction.
If both signals are active simultaneously, the drive will perform an OFF1 and ramp down to
standstill.
If both signals are disabled the drive is in OFF1 state.
R
R R
R
R
R
IRXW
21B):'
21B5(9
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
$FW $FW $FW
$FWLYH
$FWLYH $FWLYH
2))
7LPH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 7-3 2-wire control using ON_FWD and ON_REV
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
158 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
2-wire controlusing ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals (P0727 = 1)
ON_FWD ON_REV Function
0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
0 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
7.1.3 3-wire control (P0727 = 2)
Description
This method uses three commands to control the operation of the motor:
1. STOP: This signal is permanently necessary to start the motor via FWDP or REVP.
2. FWDP: Causes the motor to run in a forward direction (run right).
3. REVP: Causes the motor to run in the reverse direction (run left).
Function
The STOP signal uses negative logic: Opening the contact or maintaining it open causes an
OFF1 condition and the drive stops. The STOP contact will need to be maintained closed to
start and run the inverter.
Then a positive edge of the FWDP or REVP contact latches and starts the inverter.
A positive edge of the FWDP contact will set the forward direction.
A positive edge of the REVP contact will change to the reverse direction.
FWDP and REVP closed simultaneously will cause an OFF1.
The ramp down can be interrupted by a single new pulse FWDP or REVP.
A positive edge of the FWDP or REVP contacts while the drive is operating in the respective
direction will not cause any change.
Only by opening the STOP contact the drive will switch off regularly, apart from the special
case that both signals FWDP and REVP are present.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 159
R
R
R
IRXW
6723
):'3
5(93
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
$FWLYH
$FWLYH$FWLYH
2))
7LPH
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 7-4 3-wire control using FWDP, REVP and STOP
3-wire control using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses (P0727 = 2)
STOP FWDP REVP Function
0 0/1 0/1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 0 Inverter operates according the previous set pulse (FWDP/REVP)
1 0 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
7.1.4 3-wire control (P0727 = 3)
Description
There are three signals associated with this function:
ON_PULSE: Causes the motor to run in a forward direction if OFF1/HOLD is active.
OFF1/HOLD: This signal needs to be permanently active to start the motor via an
ON_PULSE. Opening of the contact causes the motor to stop with
OFF1.
REV: This signal causes the motor to change to reverse direction if
OFF1/HOLD and ON_PULSE are active.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.1 2-/3-Wire Control
Frequency converter
160 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Function
The switch OFF1/HOLD uses negative logic: the contact will need to be maintained closed in
order to switch the inverter ON or keep it running.
A positive edge of the ON_PULSE switch latches and starts the inverter if it was OFF before.
The direction can be determined and changed at any time using the REV signal The REV
signal needs to be permanently active.
Opening or closing the ON_PULSE switch while the drive runs has no effect.
Only enabling (e.g. Opening) OFF1/HOLD will unlatch the run-state and then stop the
inverter.
R
R R
IRXW
21B38/6(
2))+2/'
&RPPDQGLJQRUHG
$FWLYH
$FWLYH
$FWLYH
$FWLYH
$FWLYH
7LPH
2))
5(9
&RQWURO
FRPPDQGV
,QYHUWHU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 7-5 3-wire control using ON_PULSE, OFF1/HOLD and REV
3-wire control using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses (P0727 = 3)
OFF1/
HOLD
ON_
PULSE
REV Function
0 0/1 0/1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 0 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 0 1 Inverter ramps down to standstill with OFF1 from any frequency
1 1 0 Inverter accelerates to setpoint
1 1 1 Inverter accelerates to inverse setpoint
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 161
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Data
Parameter range: P1001 - r1025
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP3200, FP3210
Description
The fixed frequency functionality allows entering a frequency setpoint to the drive. It can be
selected using the Fixed Frequencies (P1001 … P1101) or using the PID Fixed Frequencies
(P2201 … P2223), see section "Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies".
This is an alternative method of entering a setpoint instead of using the analog inputs, the
serial communications interface, the JOG function or a motorized potentiometer.
There are two modes to select fixed frequencies, which are set via the parameter P1016:
● Direct selection (P1016 = 1)
● Binary selection (P1016 = 2)
ON command combined with fixed frequency
The fixed frequency status bit r1025 (binector output) allows to combine the fixed frequency
selection with an ON command. For this, P0840 must be set to r1025.
CAUTION
Please note that the meaning of P0840 may change with using the 2-/3-wire control
functionality.
When using digital inputs the signal source can be selected using one of the following
methods:
● Standard method (default)
● BICO method
Note
The standard method has priority over the BICO method. This means the digital inputs
DI3 … DI6 must be set to another value than 15, 16, 17, 18 before BICO connection can
be performed.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Frequency converter
162 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Direct selection (P1016 = 1)
With the default settings, in this mode, the fixed frequency can be selected using permanent
signals for the fixed frequency sources, selected using P1020 ... P1023 (default DI3 ... DI6).
If several fixed frequencies are active simultaneously, the frequencies are added together.
This means if DI3, DI4 and DI6 are active then the resultant frequency is FF1+FF2+FF4.
This allows up to 15 combinations for the selection of fixed frequencies.
The values for the FF1 … FF4 are given in P1001 … P1004.
1
+
+
+
r1024
P1003
P1001
0
0
P1016 = 1
DI3
DI5 r0722
r0722
P1020
P1022
r1025
722:5
722:3
P1004
0
DI6 r0722
P1023
722:6
722:4
DI4 r0722
P1021
P1002
0
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
P0706 = 17 or P0706 = 99
P0707 = 18 or P0707 = 99
P0705 = 16 or P0705 = 99
Figure 7-6 Direct selection of fixed frequencies - functional overview
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 163
Binary-coded selection (P1016 = 2)
Using this technique up to 15 different fixed frequencies can be selected using permanent
signals for the fixed frequency sources, selected using P1020 … P1023. The frequencies are
indirectly selected using the binary coding of the status of the fixed frequency sources as
shown in the table below.
Table 7- 3 Example of selecting fixed frequencies using binary
FF number Frequency P1023 P1022 P1021 P1020
FF1 P1001 0 0 0 1
FF2 P1002 0 0 1 0
FF3 P1003 0 0 1 1
FF4 P1004 0 1 0 0
… … … … … …
FF14 P1014 1 1 1 0
FF15 P1015 1 1 1 1
722:4
P1021
DI4 r0722
r1024
0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1
1
P1016 = 2
DI3
DI5 r0722
r0722
P1020
P1022
r1025
722:5
722:3
DI6 r0722
P1023
722:6
P0705 = 16 or P0705 = 99
)L[HG)UHT
>+]@
3'
)L[HG)UHT
>+]@
3'
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
P0706 = 17 or P0706 = 99
P0707 = 18 or P0707 = 99
Figure 7-7 Binary selection of fixed frequencies - functional overview
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.2 Setpoint via Fixed Frequencies
Frequency converter
164 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Parameter Description Setting
Select source for fixed frequency selection, e.g. digital inputs (P0722.x) or any binary output parameter (BO).
P1001 -
P1015 = …
Fixed frequency 1 - 15
possible values: - 650 Hz … 650 Hz, default settings 0 Hz … 65 Hz in 5 Hz-steps
P1016 = … Fixed frequency mode
1 direct selection (default), 2 binary-coded selection
P1020 = … Fixed freq. Selection Bit 0
e.g 722.x (digital inputs) / r2091.00 (serial interface)
P1021 = … Fixed freq. Selection Bit 1
e.g 722.x (digital inputs) / r2091.01 (serial interface)
P1022 = … Fixed freq. Selection Bit 2
e.g 722.x (digital inputs) / r2091.02 (serial interface)
P1023 = … Fixed freq. Selection Bit 3
e.g 722.x (digital inputs) / r2091.03 (serial interface)
Output values
Parameter Description Setting
r1024 Actual fixed frequency
P1016 = 0: Sum of selected fixed frequencies
P1016 = 1: Fixed frequency of binary-coded value
r1025 Fixed frequency status
0 = no fixed frequency selected
1 = at least one fixed frequency selected
Examples via digital inputs or serial interface
Table 7- 4 Selection of fixed frequencies with direct selection (P1016 = 0)
Method Input settings
Standard
method -
using digital
inputs
P0704 = 15: DI3 as source for FF selection Bit 0 (P1020)
P0705 = 16: DI4 as source for FF selection Bit 1(P1021)
P0706 = 17: DI5 as source for FF selection Bit 2 (P1022)
P0707 = 18: DI5 as source for FF selection Bit 3 (P1023)
P1020 = 722.3: FF selector Bit 0 (DI3) // P1021 = 722.4: FF selector Bit 1 (DI4)
P1022 = 722.5: FF selector Bit 2 (DI5) // P1021 = 722.4: FF selector Bit 3 (DI6)
BICO
method -
using serial
interface
P0704 - P0707 ≠ 15, 16, 17, 18, BICO parameterization enabled,
P1020 = 2091.0: FF selector Bit 0 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 0 ,
P1021 = 2091.1: FF selector Bit 1 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 1
P1022 = 2091.2: FF selector Bit 2 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 2
P1023 = 2091.3: FF selector Bit 3 -> serial interface control word 2, Bit 3
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 165
7.3 PID Controller
Data
Parameter range: P2200, P2201 … P2355
Warnings: A0936
Faults: F0221, F0222
Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310, FP3400, FP5000, FP5100
Features: cycle time: 8 ms
Description
The integrated PID controller (technology controller) calculates a frequency setpoint that can
be used to control process quantities such as pressure or level. The setpoint can be used as
main setpoint or as additional setpoint.
As main setpoint it can be used for the following applications:
● Closed-loop pressure control for extruders
● Closed-loop water level control for pump motors
● Closed-loop temperature control for fan motors.
As additional setpoint the following applications are possible:
● Closed-loop dancer roll position control for winder applications and similar control tasks.
1P2200 = 1:0
1)
P2251 = 0
2P2200 = 1:0
2)
P2251 = 1
x
2
v
2
v
1
2
1
v
2
*
x
2
*
x
2
p
2
*
p
2
p
2
ON:
OFF1/3:
ON:
OFF1/3:
ON:
OFF1/3:
ON:
OFF1/3:
−
−
−
-
-
SUM
setpoint
PID
RFG PID
AFM RFG
SUM PID controller RFG PID-RFG
1)
will take change with drive running
2)
change only taken when drive stopped
Dancer control active
active
active
active
active
active
PID
setpoint
PID
feedback
PID
limit
Motor
control
Setpoint via
PID control
PID control
Dancer control
PID
setpoint
PID
feedback
PID
RFG PID PID
limit AFM RFG Motor
control
Application Control structure
Figure 7-8 PID application examples
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
166 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The technology controller setpoints and actual values can be entered using the PID
motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP), PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF), analog inputs (AI) or
through the serial interface as shown in the figure below. The appropriate parameterization
of the BICO parameter defines which setpoints or actual values are to be used.
3
3
3
3
ಥ
3
ෙ3,'
3,'
680
3,'
37
3,'
5)*
3,'
37
3,'
6&/
3,'
3,'2XWSXW
0RWRU
FRQWURO
352),%86
U
352),QHW
U
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
U[
%2367$57(5
U
866RQ56
U
866RQ56
U
Figure 7-9 Structure of the technology controller
Input values
Table 7- 5 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2200 = … Enable PID controller
0: disabled (default)
1: enabled
P2235 = … Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd)
possible sources: 19.13 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2032.13 (USS on RS232), 2036.13 (USS
on RS485), 2090.13 (PROFIBUS), r8890.13 (PROFInet)
P2236 = … Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd)
possible sources: 19.14 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2032.14 (USS on RS232), 2036.14 (USS
on RS485), 2090.14 (PROFIBUS), 8890.14 (PROFInet)
Table 7- 6 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2251 = … PID mode
0: PID as setpoint (default)
1: PID as trim source
P2253 = … PID setpoint
possible sources: 755.0 (Analog input 0), 2224 (Act. fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint
of PID-MOP)
P2254 = … PID trim source
possible sources: 755.0 (Analog input 0), 2224 (Act. fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint
of PID-MOP)
P2255 = … PID setpoint gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 167
Parameter Description Setting
P2256 = … PID trim gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2257 = … Ramp-up time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s , default 1 s
P2258 = … Ramp-down time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s, default 1 s
P2263 = … PID controller type
0: D component on feedback signal (default)
1: D component on error signal
P2264 = … PID feedback
possible sources: 755.1 (Analog input 1), 2224 (Act. fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint
of PID-MOP)
P2265 = … PID feedback filter timeconstant
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
P2267 = … Max. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2268 = … Min. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2269 = … Gain applied to PID feedback
0 … 500 %, default 100 %
P2270 = … PID feedback function selector
0: Disabled (default)
1: Square root
2: Square
3: Cube
P2271 = … PID transducer type
0: Disabled (default)
1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2274 = … PID derivative time
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
P2280 = … PID proportional gain
0 … 65, default 3
P2285 = … PID integral time
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
P2291 = … PID output upper limit
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2292 = … PID output lower limit
-200 … 200 %, default 0 %
P2293 = … Ramp-up/-down time of PID limit
0 … 100 s, default 1 s
P2295 = … Gain applied to PID output
-100 … 100 %, default 100 %
P2350 = … PID autotune enable
0: PID autotuning disabled (default)
1: PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
2: PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
168 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Parameter Description Setting
P2354 = … PID tuning timeout length
60 … 65000 s, default 240 s
P2355 = … PID tuning offset
0 … 20 s, default 5 s
Output value
r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint
r2225 PID Fixed frequency status
r2250 Output setpoint of PID-MOP
r2260 PID setpoint after PID-RFG
P2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant
r2262 Filtered PID setp. after RFG
r2266 PID filtered feedback
r2272 PID scaled feedback
r2273 PID error
r2294 Act. PID output
Example
Permanent PID controller should fulfill the following secondary conditions:
● PID controller enabled and
● PID setpoint input via PID fixed frequencies and
● PID actual value via the analog input.
Table 7- 7 Parameterization
Permanent PID controller enabled P2200 = 1.0
Setpoint input via PID-FF P2253 = 2224
Actual value input via analog input AI P2264 = 755
Setpoint input via PID P2251 = 0
The additional setpoint is added to the main setpoint (PID-SUM) and the sum is fed to the
setpoint-actual value summation point through the PID ramp-function generator (PID-RFG).
The source of the supplementary setpoint (BICO parameter P2254), the ramp-up/ramp-down
times of the PID ramp-function generator (P2257, P2258) as well as the filter time (P2261)
can be adapted to the particular application by appropriately parametrizing the
corresponding parameters.
Similar to the PID setpoint branch, the actual value branch of the technological controller has
a filter (PID-PT1) which can be set using parameter P2265. In addition to the smoothing, the
actual value can be modified using a scaling unit (PID-SCL).
The technology controller can be parameterized as either P, I, PI or PID controller using
parameters P2280, P2285 or P2274.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 169
3
U
U
3
3
U
3
U
3
3
3 3
7Q
.S
[
\
G
GW
3,'
VHWSRLQW
3,'
IHHGEDFN
0RWRU
FRQWURO
Figure 7-10 PID controller
For specific applications, the PID output quantity can be limited to defined values. This can
be achieved using the fixed limits - P2291 and P2292. In order to prevent the PID controller
output exercising large steps at power-on, these PID output limits are ramped-up with ramp
time P2293 from 0 to the corresponding value P2291 (upper limit for the PID output) and
P2292 (lower limit for the PID output). As soon as these limits have been reached, the
dynamic response of the PID controller is no longer limited by this ramp-up/ramp-down time
(P2293).
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
170 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
7.3.1 PID dancer roll control
Data
Parameter range: P1070, P1075, P1120, P1121, P2200,
P2251 … P2285
Warnings: -
Fault: -
Function chart number: -
Description
For various continuous production processes, for example, in the paper and pulp industry or
in the manufacture of cables, it is necessary to control (closed-loop) the velocity of stations
along the production process to ensure the continuous material web is not subject to any
unwanted tension levels. It is important that no folds or creases are formed. For applications
such as these, it is practical to provide a type of material buffer in the form of a loop with a
defined tension. This provides a de-coupling between the individual inverter locations. This
loop represents the difference between the material fed-in and that fed-out and therefore
indicates the process quality.
Using the PID dancer roll control, with inverter it is possible to ensure that continuous
material webs have a constant tension.
YY
Y
[
[
[
680
VHWSRLQW
0RWRU
FRQWURO
3,'
VHWSRLQW
3,'
IHHGEDFN
3,'
5)*
3,'
OLPLW
3,'
$)0 5)*
6WUXFWXUH $SSOLFDWLRQ
Figure 7-11 PID dancer roll control
The velocity v1 is assumed to be an independent disturbance; the input velocity v2 should be
controlled using motor rolls A2 so that the length x2 of the loop corresponds, as far as
possible, to the setpoint.
Note
When selecting the closed-loop dancer roll control it should be noted that neither PID-MOP
nor PID-FF should be used - but instead the MOP (motorized potentiometer) or the FF (fixed
frequencies).
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 171
The structure and important parameters for the PID dancer roll control are shown below.
023
$,
))
866RQ
56
866RQ
56
)LHOGEXV
$,
3
3
3
3
3
3
680
3,'
680
3,'
37
3
$)0
3,'
5)*
5)*
3,'
37
3,'
6&/
3
3,'
0RWRU
FRQWURO
3,'
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Δ3,' 2XWSXW
B
Figure 7-12 Structure of the closed-loop PID dancer roll control
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
172 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Input values
Table 7- 8 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P1070 = … Main setpoint
1024: Fixed setpoint (FF)
1050: MOP
755.0: Analog input 0
2015.1: USS on RS232
2018.1: USS on RS485
2050.1: Fieldbus (default)
P1074 = … Disable additional setpoint
possible sources: P755.x (Digital input)
P1120 = … Ramp-up time
0 … 650 s, default 10 s
P1121 = … Ramp-down time
0 … 650 s, default 10 s
P2200 = … Enable PID controller
1: PID controller always active
722.x: Digital input x
P2251 = … PID mode
0: PID as setpoint (default)
1: PID as trim
P2253 = … PID setpoint
possible sources: P755.0 (Analog input 0) / r2224 (Fixed setpoint) / r2250 (active setpoint)
P2254 = … PID trim source
possible sources: P755.0 (Analog input 0) / r2224 (Fixed setpoint) / r2250 (active setpoint)
P2264 = … PID feedback
possible sources: P755.1 (Analog input 1) / r2224 (Fixed setpoint) / r2250 (active setpoint)
Table 7- 9 Additional commissioning parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2255 = … PID setpoint gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2256 = … PID trim gain factor
0 … 100, default 100
P2265 = … PID feedback filter timeconstant
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
P2271 = … PID transducer type
0: Disabled (default)
1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2280 = … PID proportional gain
0 … 65, default 3
P2285 = … PID integral time
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 173
Output value
Parameter Description Setting
r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG
P2261 PID setpoint filter timeconstant
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setp. after RFG
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback
r2273 CO: PID error
Additional parameters regarding the PID controller function
Parameter Description Setting
P2257 = … Ramp-up time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s, default 1 s
P2258 = … Ramp-down time for PID setpoint
0 … 650 s, default 1 s
P2263 = … PID controller type
0: D component on feedback signal (default)
1: D component on error signal
P2267 = … Max. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2268 = … Min. value for PID feedback
-200 … 200 %, default 100 %
P2269 = … Gain applied to PID feedback
0 … 500 %, default 100 %
P2270 = … PID feedback function selector
0: Disabled (default)
1: Square root
2: Square
3: Cube
P2274 = … PID derivative time
0 … 60 s, default 0 s
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
174 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
7.3.2 PID Motorized Potentiometer
Data
Parameter range: P2231 … r2250
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: FP3400
Description
The PID controller has a PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) which can be separately
adjusted. Its functionality is identical with the motorized potentiometer, whereby the
PID parameters are set in the range from P2231 … r2250.
Table 7- 10 Correspondence between the parameters
PID motorized potentiometer Motorized potentiometer
P2231 PID-MOP mode P1031 MOP mode
P2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP P1032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP
P2235 Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) P1035 Enable MOP (UP-command)
P2236 Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) P1036 Enable MOP (DOWN-command)
P2240 Setpoint of PID-MOP P1040 Setpoint of the MOP
P2241 PID-MOP select set point
automatically/manually
P1041 MOP select set point
automatically/manually
P2242 PID-MOP auto setpoint P1042 MOP auto setpoint
P2243 BI: PID-MOP accept ramp generator
setpoint
P1043 MOP accept ramp generator setpoint
P2244 PID-MOP ramp generator setpoint P1044 MOP ramp generator setpoint
P2247 PID-MOP ramp up time (acceleration
time) of the rfg
P1047 MOP ramp up time (acceleration
time) of the rfg
P2248 PID-MOP ramp down time
(acceleration time) of the rfg
P1048 MOP ramp down time (acceleration
time) of the rfg
r2245 PID-MOP input frequency of the
ramp generator
r1045 MOP input frequency of the ramp
generator
r2250 Output setpoint of PID-MOP r1050 Act. Output freq. of the MOP
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 175
Note
Differences between MOP and PID-MOP:
The MOP setpoint is given as a frequency value (default 5 Hz), the PID MOP setpoint as a
percentage of the reference parameters P2000 … P2004 (default 10 %).
The MOP command source can be changed via P0700. The PID-MOP can only be changed
via BICO signals.
Examples
Table 7- 11 PID-MOP setpoint sources
Source
Function
Option port, e.g. BOP PROFIBUS Digital inputs
P2235 Enable PID-MOP UP = 19.13 = r2090.13 = 722.4 (DI4)
P2236 Enable PID-MOP DOWN = 19.14 = r2090.14 = 722.5 (DI5)
See also
Motorized Potentiometer (MOP) (Page 34)
7.3.3 Setpoint via PID Fixed Frequencies
Data
Parameter range: P2201 … r2225
Warnings: -
Faults : -
Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310
Description
The functionality of the PID fixed frequencies is identical with the function "setpoint via fixed
frequencies".
The use of the Fixed Frequencies and PID Fixed Frequency at the same time is not possible.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
176 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Table 7- 12 Correspondence between the parameters
PID fixed frequencies Fixed frequencies
P2201 -
P2215
Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15 P1001 -
P1015
Fixed frequency 1 - 15
P2216 Fixed PID setpoint mode P1016 Fixed frequency mode
P2220 Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0 P1020 Fixed freq. Selection Bit 0
P2221 Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1 P1021 Fixed freq. Selection Bit 1
P2222 Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2 P1022 Fixed freq. Selection Bit 2
P2223 Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3 P1023 Fixed freq. Selection Bit 3
r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint r1024 Actual fixed frequency
r2225 PID Fixed frequency status r1025 Fixed frequency status
Input values
Table 7- 13 Main function parameters
Parameter Description Setting
P2201 -
P2215 = …
Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15
-200 … 200 Hz: Defines Fixed PID setpoint 1 - 15 (0% = default)
P2216 = … Fixed PID setpoint mode
1 direct selection (default) 2 binary selection
P2220 = … Fixed PID setp. select Bit 0
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2033.00 (option port) / r2091.00 (serial interface)
(722.3 = default)
P2221 = … Fixed PID setp. select Bit 1
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2033.01 (option port) / r2091.01 (serial interface)
(722.4 = default)
P2222 = … Fixed PID setp. select Bit 2
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2033.02 (option port) / r2091.02 (serial interface)
(722.5 = default)
P2223 = … Fixed PID setp. select Bit 3
possible sources: 722.x (digital inputs) / 2033.03 (option port) / r2091.03 (serial interface)
(722.6 = default)
Output value
Parameter Description Setting
r2224 Act. fixed PID setpoint
P1016 = 0: Sum of selected fixed frequencies
P1016 = 1: Fixed frequency of binary-coded value
r2225 PID Fixed frequency status
0 = no fixed frequency selected
1 = at least one fixed frequency selected
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.3 PID Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 177
Example direct selection
Table 7- 14 Direct selection (P2216 = 1) using digital inputs
FF number Frequency P2223 P2222 P2221 P2220
PID-FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0 0
PID-FF1 P2201 0 0 0 1
PID-FF2 P2202 0 0 1 0
PID-FF3 P2203 0 1 0 0
PID-FF4 P2204 1 0 0 0
PID-(FF1+FF2) 0 0 1 1
PID-(FF1+FF2+FF3) 0 1 1 1
PID-(FF1+FF2+FF3+FF4) 1 1 1 1
...
+
1
...
...
...
P2216 = 1
DI3 r0722
r2225
P2220
P2201 r2224
0
722:3
P0704 = 15 or P0704 = 99
Figure 7-13 Directly selected PID fixed setpoint using DI3
Example binary selection
Table 7- 15 Binary selection (P2216 = 2) using digital inputs
FF number Frequency P2223 P2222 P2221 P2220
PID-FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0 0
PID-FF1 P2201 0 0 0 1
PID-FF2 P2202 0 0 1 0
… … … … … …
PID-FF14 P2214 1 1 1 0
PID-FF15 P2215 1 1 1 1
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)
Frequency converter
178 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)
Data
Quantity: 6 … 9 + 2 (depends on CU variant)
Parameter range: P0701 … P0712, P0713
r0720 … P0724
Function chart number: FP2000, FP2200
Features:
cycle time: 2 ms
switch-on threshold: ≥ 15 V
switch-off threshold: ≤ 5 V
electrical features: G120: electrically isolated, short-circuit proof
Description
External control signals are required for an inverter to be able to operate autonomously.
These signals can be entered using a serial interface as well as using digital inputs (see
figure below). The SINAMICS G120 has depending on CU variant up to 9 digital inputs which
can be expanded by using the 2 analog inputs. The digital inputs can be freely programmed
to create a function. Regarding the programming, it is possible to directly assign the function
using parameters P0701 … P0713 or to freely program the function using BICO technology.
7
9
9
3
3[[[[%,
U
U
3
',FKDQQHOHJ',
&2%2%LQLQSYDO
'HERXQFHWLPH',
3
)XQFWLRQ
Figure 7-14 Digital inputs
The number of available digital inputs is displayed in parameter r0720. The logical states of
the digital inputs can be de-bounced using P0724 and read-out using parameter r0722
(BICO monitoring parameter). Further, this parameter is used for BICO parameterization of
the digital inputs (refer to BICO parameterization in the following section).
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 179
Digital inputs and analog inputs used as digital inputs
Following digital inputs are available:
CU240S and CU240S DP: DP P0701 … P0709,
P0712, P0713 analog inputs used as digital inputs
CU240S DP-F: DP P0701 … P0706,
P0712, P0713 analog inputs used as digital inputs
To use P0712 or P0713 as analog input set the parameter value = 0. To use it as digital
input, set the parameter according the commands listed in the following table.
Table 7- 16 Possible settings of the digital inputs and analog inputs used as digital inputs
Parameter
Value
Significance
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON_REV/OFF1
3 OFF2 – coast to standstill
4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed frequency selector Bit 0
16 Fixed frequency selector Bit 1
17 Fixed frequency selector Bit 2
18 Fixed frequency selector Bit 3
25 Enable DC braking
27 Enable PID
29 External trip
33 Disable additional frequency setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.4 Digital inputs (DI)
Frequency converter
180 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Example
An ON/OFF1 command is to be accomplished using digital input DI0.
● P0700 = 2 Control enabled using the terminal strip (digital inputs)
● P0701 = 1 ON/OFF1 using digital input 0 (DI0).
Note
If an analog input has been configured as a digital input, the following limit values apply:
Voltage > 4 V = logical 1
Voltage < 1.6 V = logical 0
BICO parameterization
If the setting 99 (BICO) is entered into parameters P0701 … P07013, then the BICO wiring is
enabled for the appropriate digital input. The output parameter number of the function (the
parameter, included in the parameter text BO) should be entered into the command source
(the parameter which contains the code BI in the parameter text).
Example
A relay is to be controlled directly using DI0.
● P0700 = 2 Control enabled using digital inputs
● P0701 = 99 Enable BICO parameterization on DI0
● P0731[0] = 722.0 Relay 1 controlled directly.
This can be useful when the normal relay functions and digital inputs are not required so the
user can use them for their own purposes.
Note
Only experienced users should use the BICO parameterization and for applications where
the possibilities provided by P0701 … P07013 are no longer adequate.
If P0701 … P07013 are set to 99, then the command source can only be changed by the use
of P0700. For example, changing P0701 from 99 to 1 will not change the command source
or alter the existing BICO settings.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 181
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)
Data
Quantity: 3
Parameter range: r0730 … P0748
Function chart number: FP2100
Features:
cycle time: 10 ms
Description
Three output relays are provided which can be programmed to indicate a variety of states of
the inverter, such as faults, warnings, current limit conditions, etc.
Some of the more popular settings are pre-selected (see table below), but others can be
allocated using the BICO internal connection feature.
Relay:
max. opening/closing time: 5/10 ms
voltage/current 30 V DC/0.5 A maximum
3>@
U
U
12
&20
1&
12
&20
12
&20
1&
3>@
3>@
U
U
U
U
3
3
3
,QYHUW'2V
%,)FWRI'2
%,)FWRI'2
%,)FWRI'2
,QYHUW'2V
&2%26WDWH'2V
&2%26WDWH'2V
&2%26WDWH'2V
,QYHUW'2V
Figure 7-15 Digital outputs
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.5 Digital outputs (DO)
Frequency converter
182 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The states, which are to be output, are defined using the "BI" parameters P0731 (digital
output 0), P0732 (digital output 1) and P0733 (digital output 2). For the definition, the "BO"
parameter number or "CO/BO" parameter number and the bit number of the particular state
should be entered into P0731 … P0733. Frequently used states including the parameter
number and bit are shown in the table below.
Table 7- 17 Parameters P0731 to P0733 (frequently used functions/states)
Parameter value Significance
52.0 Drive ready
52.1 Drive ready to run
52.2 Drive running
52.3 Drive fault active
52.4 OFF2 active
52.5 OFF3 active
52.6 ON inhibit active
52.7 Drive warning active
52.8 Deviation, setpoint/actual value
52.9 PZD control
52.10 f_act >= P1082 (f_max)
52.11 Warning: Motor current limit
52.12 Brake active
52.13 Motor overload
52.14 Motor runs right
52.15 Inverter overload
53.0 DC brake active
53.1 f_act < P2167 (f_off)
53.2 f_act > P1080 (f_min)
53.3 Actual current r0027 ≥ P2170
53.6 f_act ≥ setpoint (f_set)
Note
On the OP the bit numbers are displayed in hex-format (0..9, A..F).
For complete list of all of the binary status parameters (refer to "CO/BO" parameters) in the
Parameter Manual.
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 183
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter)
Data
Quantity: 2
Parameter range: P0750 … P0762
Function chart number: FP2200
Features:
cycle time: 4 ms
resolution: 10 bits
accuracy: 1 % referred to 10 V / 20 mA
electrical features: incorrect polarity protection, short-circuit proof
Description
Analog setpoints, actual values and control signals are read into the inverter using the
appropriate analog inputs and are converted into digital signals or values using the A/D
converter.
The setting as to whether the analog input is a voltage input (10 V) or a current input (20 mA)
must be selected via P0756 and via the DIP switches on the housing of the Control Unit. For
failure-free operation, the DIP switches and the P0756 must be set. For details, refer to the
Operating Instructions of your inverter.
Note
The bipolar voltage input is only possible with analog input 0 (AI0).
Depending on the AI type or source, the appropriate connection must be made. Using, as an
example, the internal 10 V voltage source, a connection is shown in the figure below.
$
'
9
9
$,
$,
!N˖
$
'
9
9
$,
$,
$
'
$,
$,
$
'
$,
$,
P$
Figure 7-16 Example of a connection for AI voltage and current input
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.6 Analog inputs (A/D converter)
Frequency converter
184 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The AI channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone, see figure below).
./
./
$
'
3
3
3
3
U 3[[[[
U
3
$,
$,
U
U
U;
3
3
3
$,
W\SH
$,
W\SH
',3VZLWFK
$,
VFDOLQJ
$,
GHDG]RQH
)XQFWLRQ
Figure 7-17 AI channel
Note
When the filter time constant P0753 (AI-PT1) is increased, this smooths the AI input signal
therefore reducing the ripple. When this function is used within a control loop, this smoothing
has a negative impact on the control behavior and immunity to noise (the dynamic
performance deteriorates).
Note
The analog inputs can be used as digital inputs with the switching thresholds: high > 4 V,
low < 1.6 V. Setting P0712 and P0713 > 0 assign digital input functions to the analog inputs.
The following figure shows a connecting example:
&8
$
'
9
9
$,
$,
$
'
$,
$,
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 185
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)
Data
Quantity: 2
Parameter range: r0770 … P0785
Function chart number: FP2300
Features:
cycle time: 4 ms
resolution: 12 bit
accuracy: 1 % referred to 20 mA
Description
Two analog outputs are provided which can be programmed to indicate a variety of
variables. Some of the more popular settings are pre-selected (see table below), but others
(BICO outputs) can be allocated using the BICO internal connection feature.
Table 7- 18 Pre-set analog outputs
Parameter Description
r0020 CO: Frequency setpoint before RFG
r0021 CO: Actual filtered frequency
r0024 CO: Actual filtered output frequency
r0025 CO: Actual filtered output voltage
r0026 CO: Actual filtered DC-link voltage
r0027 CO: Actual filtered output current
… …
r0052 CO/BO: Actual status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Actual status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Actual control word 1
… …
Functions only available with G120 inverters
7.7 Analog outputs (D/A converter)
Frequency converter
186 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
In order to adapt the signal, the D/A converter channel has several function units (filter,
scaling, dead zone) which can be used to modify the digital signal before conversion (see
figure below).
1
0
'
$$2
$2
U[[[[ 3
P$
3
3
3
3
U
33
3
U
U
)XQFWLRQ $2
VFDOLQJ
$2
GHDG]RQH
Figure 7-18 D/A converter channel
Note
The analog output 0 (AO0) can be changed-over from current output (P0776 = 0) to voltage
output (P0776 = 1).
The analog output 1 (AO1) only provide current output (0 … 20 mA). The 0 … 10 V voltage
signal can be generated by connecting a 500 Ω resistor across the outputs. The voltage drop
across the resistor can be read using parameter r0774 if the parameter P0776 is changed-
over from current output (P0776 = 0) to voltage output (P0776 = 1). The D/A scaling
parameters P0778, P0780 and the D/A converter dead zone must still be entered in mA (0
… 20 mA).
With setting parameter P0775 = 1 it is possible to detect negative values on the input side of
the D/A converter channel. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute value of the
value to be outputed (the AO-linear characteristic is mirrored on the y axis). If the value was
originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is set.
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 187
Fail-Safe Functions 8
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Overview
WARNING
Installation and protection level of frequency inverters in fail-safe systems
All installation areas for frequency inverters with fail-safe functions as well as outside
installed components of the according fail-safe system, if correctly installed, must comply
with the minimum protection level of IP54 [see EN 60529 (IEC 60529)].
Change of frequency inverters with fail-safe functions
When carrying out a swap of frequency inverters, it is not allowed to replace a frequency
inverter with fail-safe functions with a Standard frequency inverter. Replacing a frequency
inverter with fail-safe functions with a Standard frequency inverter disables all fail-safe
functions that have been implemented and therefore can lead to personal injury and
damage to the machine. A replacement of fail-safe components with standard components
has to be considered as a completely new application and re-commissioned as such.
Dimensioning of the Motor
If regenerative loads occur in the application, the motor must be dimensioned so that its slip
in super-synchronous operation always remains below the rated slip.
Dimensioning of the Motor holding brake
The motor holding brake must be dimensioned that in case of a fault the complete drive can
be braked to zero from any possible operational speed. If no holding brake is present, the
machine manufacturer must adopt other suitable measures of protection against motion
after the power to the motor has been cut (e.g. to protect against sagging loads).
Regenerative load with SLS
With the fail-safe functions "safely limited speed" (SLS) and "safe stop 1" (SS1) operation
with permanent regenerative loads is not permitted.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
188 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Note
In order to verify the parameters for the fail-safe functions, an acceptance test must always
be carried-out after commissioning, reset and also when changing a completely backed-up
data set of the parameters for the fail-safe functions. This acceptance test must be
appropriately logged and documented. For more details refer to section "Acceptance Test
and Acceptance Log" in the Operating Instructions.
The frequency inverter with fail-safe functions has specific fail-safe functions integrated into
its system. These are:
● Safe Torque Off (STO)
● Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
● Safely limited Speed (SLS)
● Safe Brake Control (SBC) (only CU240S DP-F)
Fail-safe functions are only available on the following components:
● SINAMICS G120 with
– CU240S DP-F
– CU240S PN-F
● SINAMICS G120D with CU240D DP-F
On standard inverters fail-safe features are not available.
The parameters for fail-safe functions are held on two separate processors within the
frequency inverter. Each processor holds a unique copy of the parameterized fail-safe
function.
These unique copies of the fail-safe parameters are accomplished by double-parameters.
Double-parameters have their own unique number, but have identical functionality.
Each processor controls one separate and isolated control mechanism which is continually
monitored by the system to ensure it is operating correctly. Should a discrepancy occur, then
the passivatied STO is activated.
Note
PROFIsafe via PROFInet
When using fail-safe functions with a CU240S PN-F or a CU240D PN-F see also:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/25412441
See also
Excel tool (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21627074)
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 189
8.1.1 Permissible applications for the fail-safe functions
Restrictions when using fail-safe functions
The fail-safe function "Safe torque off" (STO) and "Safe brake control" SBC can be used
without restriction for all applications.
The fail-safe functions "Safe stop 1" (SS1) and "Safely limited speed" (SLS) are permissible
for all applications where there can be no acceleration of the load after the frequency inverter
has been shut down.
The fail-safe, drive-autonomous inverter functions
With its integrated, drive-autonomous fail-safe functions, the inverter is also ideal for use in
applications with increased safety requirements corresponding to SIL2 in accordance with
IEC 61508 and Cat.3 pursuant to EN 954-1:
● Safely limited speed:
The frequency inverter monitors whether a set ouptut frequency limit value is exceeded,
without additional external components
● Safe Stop 1:
The frequency inverter reduces the ouptut frequency using a braking ramp until it reaches
a standstill, and continually monitors this braking process without additional external
components
● Safe torque off:
The frequency inverter switches the motor to a torque-free state.
Prerequisites for using fail-safe functions
For each machine, a risk assessment must have been carried out (e.g., in accordance with
EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery – Principles for risk assessment"). This risk assessment
provides both the functional requirements for safety-related controls and the required
classification, e.g., in accordance with SIL (Safety Integrity Level).
In order to make use of the frequency inverter’s fail-safe functions the closed-loop control
must work perfectly. The drive (drive = inverter + motor + brake + driven machine) must be
set up in such a way that all operations of the driven machine are properly controlled and the
inverter remains below its limit values (for current, temperature, voltage, etc.). The inverter’s
power and parameter settings must be suited to both the connected motor and to the
application.
When the system has been successfully commissioned, it is necessary to check the typical
operating conditions and those related to the limit values, in the form of an acceptance test.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
190 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Types of closed-loop control
Assuming that the above prerequisites are met, all fail-safe functions ("Safe torque off",
"Safe stop 1" and "Safely limited speed") are permissible and certified for V/f control and
vector control.
Applications with safe evaluation of the inverter feedback
In applications where safe machine functions may only be carried out if the ouptut frequency
is below a certain threshold value, it is essential that the feedback from the inverter be
evaluated accurately. An example of this kind of application would be bolting a protective
door in a drive that is still spinning.
The frequency inverter does not have any safe output signals. However, on a safe PLC, for
example, the inverter feedback can still be safely evaluated with reference to the following
inverter signals:
● Evaluation of the inverter operating state as required by the SS1 function.
Once requested, the SS1 function requires the inverter to feed back an STO function at
the end of the ramp time for SS1. If this does not occur, it must be assumed that the drive
has not come to a standstill.
● Evaluation of the inverter operating state as required by the SLS function mode 1
Once requested, the SLS function mode 1, requires the inverter to report that the reduced
speed has been reached at the end of the SS1 ramp time. If this does not occur, it must
be assumed that the drive has not reached the reduced speed.
● Evaluation of inverter fault messages
Additionally, the fail-safe function inverter faults and standard function inverter faults
(r0052, bit03/r9772, bit08) should always be evaluated. No faults are expected to occur
during a safe function, but if a fault is signaled, it must be assumed that the fail-safe
function has malfunctioned.
Tolerances and reaction times
Frequency monitoring is carried out with 15 % tolerance because fail-safe functions SS1 and
SLS are executed without an encoder.
The minimum frequency for reliable processing is 1 Hz.
The typical device-internal reaction time to the activation of a fail-safe functions can be taken
as follows:
SINAMICS G120, CU240S DP-F:
● Typical reaction time to a digital signal: 20 ms + P9650 (debounce time) + P9651 (filter
time)
● Typical reaction time after receiving a PROFIsafe telegram: 20 ms
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 191
For the total reaction time within the system or machine, the following must be taken into
account alongside the time stated above:
● The time taken to detect a signal (depending on the sensor being used)
● The time taken to process the signal (depending on the CPU being used, if one is
required, and its program scope)
● If necessary, the time taken to transfer the signal via PROFIsafe (depending on the bus
system being used, the number and type of bus nodes, and the baud rate)
An Excel tool helps with estimating this reaction time.
The fault reaction times of the internal monitoring of functions SS1 and SLS depend on the
currently applicable output frequency of the inverter. For details, please refer to the
Operating Manual.
These minimum tolerance and reaction times should be taken into account when configuring
the system, e.g., in the layout of the safety clearances for the components.
Connecting a mechanical brake
Connecting a mechanical brake is recommended in the case of applications with functions
SS1 and SLS modes 0 and 1, where dangerous states can occur as a result of external
events such as a power failure. In the event of a fault, the inverter controls its brake directly,
thereby reducing the risk of undefined machine states.
8.1.2 Application examples for fail-safe functions
Permissible applications
Permissible speed characteristic after the inverter has been shut down
I
DFW
W
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
Figure 8-1 Application of all safety functions permissible
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
192 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Forbidden applications
This is particularly pertinent to applications with overhauling loads. With an overhauling load,
the friction torque of the mechanical components (motor, gearbox, etc.) is not enough to
prevent the mechanical system from accelerating when the drive is switched off (see Figs.
below).
W
I
DFW
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
Figure 8-2 Overhauling load – not all safety functions are permissible
LQLWLDWLRQRI2))
W
I
DFW
Figure 8-3 Overhauling load – not all safety functions are permissible
Examples of overhauling loads
These are:
● hoisting gears (due to gravitation) and
● winders (due to a second drive).
WARNING
Fail-safe functions SS1 and SLS must not be used:
with overhauling loads
in conjunction with torque control.
Fail-safe function inverter faults F0396 … F0399 can be masked if standard function
inverter faults exist. In this case, an acceptance test with a full load should be carried
out.
Regenerative operation of the motors (which can occur in the case of, braking with function
SS1 for example) is permitted if there is no overhauling load.
There are no restrictions for the STO and SBC function. Of course, for risk assessment and
machine design purposes, it should be remembered that an overhauling load can only be
stopped by means of a suitable brake when the motor has been switched to a torque-free
state.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.1 Overview of the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 193
8.1.3 Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands
Overview
A fail-safe function can be intercepted by OFF command or by another failsafe command.
The following table gives an overview how the commands are prioritized.
)LUVWDFWLYH)DLOVDIHRU2))FFRPPDQG
,QWHUUXSWDEOHE\IROORZLQJ)DLOVDIHRU2))FRPPDQG
3DVVLYDWHG672
672
66
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
2))
2))
2))
3DVVLYDWHG672
672
66
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
UDPS
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
6/60RGH
2))
2))
2))
;
;
;
0
;
;
;
0
0
0
;
;
;
S672
S672
S672
;
;
;
0
0
0
;
;
;
0
0
0
;
;
;
0
0
0
;
;
;
0
0
0
0
;
;
;
;
;
0
0
0
0
;
;
;
0
0
0
0
;
Figure 8-4 Fail-safe commands, interrupted by an OFF command or another fail-safe command
Explanation to the table:
00 means the safety monitoring is still active, even if an OFF command is given. That
means, if the speed raises due to any reason above the SLS monitoring a passivated STO
will be activated.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
194 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions
Overview
There are three monitoring procedures:
● Time controlled request for forced dynamization
● Forced dynamization
● Process dynamization
The dynamization process is designed to detect hidden software and hardware faults of the
two shutdown paths. The forced dynamization consists of a processor self-test of both
processores within the inverter (standard processor and fail-safe processor) and a hardware
test. The hardware test includes a test to ensure, that if parameterised, the Safe Brake
Control is functioning correctly.
Time controlled request for forced dynamization
In fail-safe applications it is necessary to initiate a safe torque off with forced dynamization at
regular intervals. The intervall has to be set via P9659, minimum is once a year.
When the time, set in P9659 (hours or fractions of hours), has expired, a warning A1699 is
issued by the system. This warning can only be cleared by carrying out forced dynamization.
If the forced dynamization was successful, the timer is reset to the value in P9659 and the
inverter is ready to run. If the forced dynamization fails, the timer remains at 0 and the
inverter is disabled from running.
The time remaining until the next forced dynamization becomes necessary is displayed in
r9660.
At each successful forced dynamization r9660 is reset to the value of P9659.
Forced dynamization
The forced dynamization process delays the switch-on process, but ensures that all fail-safe
features of the inverter are functioning correctly. It is enabled per default and can be
changed via P9601.1 / P9801.1 (1 = enabled, 0 = disabled).
The forced dynamization process is automatically initiated at the following events,
independent from the settings of P9601 and P9801:
● On power-up of the inverter.
● When the passivated Safe Torque Off (passivated STO) function is deactivated
● When commissioning of fail-safe functions is left.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.2 Monitoring the fail-safe functions
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 195
Should the delay be unacceptable for the user application, it can be disabled via
P9601/P9801 for the following events:
● When the Safe Torque Off (STO) is left
● When Safe Stop 1 (SS1) is left after STO was reached
CAUTION
When carrying-out the forced dynamization, the shutdown paths of the motor brake are
also tested. This results in a brief opening command (2 ms to 28 ms) at the motor brake.
The mechanical part of the EM brake generally requires longer than 30 ms to open. This
means that this dynamic operation generally has no influence on the motor shaft itself.
WARNING
The customer is responsible to use only EM brakes with opening times longer than
30 ms.
Process dynamization
The process dynamization is always carried out at STO initialisation or SS1 end. The test
includes both shutdown paths and the EM-brake switching circuit but does not perform a
processor self-test or a complete test of the Safe Brake Control.
WARNING
Dynamization of the shutdown paths
For safety reasons, it is necessary to initiate a forced dynamization procedure at intervals of
maximal 8760 hours (one year) in order to check its operability. Thus, 8760 hours after the
last activation of the forced dynamization the inverter sets a status bit that specifies this
requirement.
The process control must then initiate a forced dynamization at the next opportunity, for
example, when the drive has in any case a short phase with zero speed. The setting and
clearing of the status bit and the dynamization must be logged as process data by the
higher-level control.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
196 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Maximum fault reaction time
The maximum fault reaction time during active safe braking ramp (used in SS1 and SLS) is
given as delay from crossing the parameterized envelope until triggering a passivated STO.
W
I
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
IDXOWUHDFWLRQ
WLPH
˂W
UHDFWWLPH
HQYHORSH
GHOD\
˂W
HQYHORSH
HQYHORSH
SDVVLYDWHG672OLPLW
Figure 8-5 Maximum shut-down time
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 197
Description
When parameterizing the limiting envelope for SLS and SS1 with P9680/P9880 and
P9691/P9891 the following minimum tolerances should be considered to provide maximum
robustness of the drive:
W
I
)
PLQ6/6
33
)
PLQ66
33
P
3
˂)
)
PD[
˂)
˂)
˂)
HQYHORSH
P'
6/6
P'
66
˂)
KLJK
)
WRO
33
˂)
ORZ
˂)
VOLS
)
PD[
˂)
VOLS
Figure 8-6 Safety limits for SLS and SS1
1. The minimum monitoring speed tolerance P9691 should be set to
P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ P9690 + ∆Fslip
thus defining the minimum frequency tolerance as
∆F = P9691 - P9690 - ∆Fslip
where ∆Fslip is given as ∆Fslip = r0330∙ P0310/100%
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
198 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
This prevents sporadic trips caused by measurement inaccuracies and additional slip
compensation. Note that according to the above formula, P9691 must be set, even if SLS
is not parameterized.
2. The resulting frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh due to the minimum frequency tolerance at high
frequencies is then given as
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ Fmax - ∆F
where Fmax defines the maximum process frequency at initiation of SLS or SS1.
3. The resulting frequency tolerance ∆ Flow due to the minimum frequency tolerance at low
frequencies is then given as
˂)ORZ싩 P ˂)
'
where the gradient m is defined as
P
3
The denominator D in the above formula is calculated as follows:
SLS parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9690
SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9682
SLS and SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ min [P9682, P9690]
1. The valid delay ∆Fdelay is then given as maximum of
∆Fdelay = max [∆Flow, ∆Fhigh]
2. Finally the minimum braking ramp delay can be calculated as
3싩 ˂)
GHOD\
P
The safe frequency envelope results from a time delay (P9680) in t-direction and an
additional frequency tolerance ∆F (caused by measurement inaccuracies) and ∆Fslip (caused
by slip compensation) in F-direction.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 199
Example of how to calculate the limit values for SS1 and SLS
The following example illustrates how the fail-safe formulae are calculated for the 1LA7060-
4AB10-Z motor and for the fail-safe parameter factory settings. The motor technical data and
values for calculating the necessary fail-safe parameters are given in the tables below.
Table 8- 1 Technical data
Parameter Parameter text Value
P0300 Select motor type 1 (induction motor)
P0304 Rated motor voltage 230/400 V ∆/Y
P0305 Rated motor current 0.73/0.42 A
P0307 Rated motor power 0.12 kW
P0308 Rated motor cosPhi 0.75
P0310 Rated motor frequency 50 Hz
P0311 Rated motor speed 1350 1/min
r0313 Motor pole pairs 2
Table 8- 2 Fail-safe parameter factory settings
Parameter Parameter text Value
P9681 SI braking ramp;
Ramp-down time
10 s
P9682 SI minimum speed for standstill
detection
5.0 Hz
P9690 SI setpoint for SLS 10.0 Hz
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
200 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
● Upper tolerance range for SLS P9691
The slip frequency is calculated as follows:
Fslip = r0330 ∙ P0310
where the rated motor slip r0330 is
– r0330 = (P0310 - P0311 ∙ r0313/60)/P0310 ∙ 100% →
– Fslip = (50 [Hz] - 1350 [rpm] ∙ 2/60)/50 [Hz] ∙ 100% ∙ 50 [Hz] →
Fslip = 5 [Hz] or 10 [%] of 50 [Hz] (P2000 = 50 [Hz])
The upper tolerance range for SLS P9691 is therefore:
P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ P9690 + Fslip
or
P9691 ≥ 1.15 ∙ 10 [Hz] + 5 [Hz]
P9691 ≥ 16.5 [Hz]
At this point, parameter P9691 should be selected, e.g.
P9691 = 16.5 [Hz] (or 17 [Hz]).
The minimum frequency tolerance is calculated as follows:
∆F = P9691 - P9690 - Fslip
or
∆F = 16.5 [Hz] - 10 [Hz] - 5 [Hz] = 1.5 [Hz]
● Resulting frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh
The following formula is used to determine the upper frequency tolerance ∆Fhigh:
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ Fmax - ∆F
If, for example, Fmax = 50 [Hz], then:
∆Fhigh ≥ 0.15 ∙ 50 [Hz] - 1.5 [Hz]
∆Fhigh ≥ 6 [Hz]
● Resulting frequency tolerance ∆Flow
The following formula is used to determine the lower frequency tolerance ∆Flow:
∆Flow ≥ m/D - ∆F
The rise m is calculated as follows:
m = 200/P9681 = 200 [Hz]/10 [s] = 20 [Hz/s]
Value D is calculated as follows for each of the items below:
SLS parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9690 = 2 ∙ 10 [Hz] = 20 [Hz]
SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ P9682 = 2 ∙ 5 [Hz] = 10 [Hz]
SLS and SS1 parameterized D = 2 ∙ min [P9682, P9690]
D = 2 ∙ min [5 [Hz], 10[Hz]] = 10 [Hz]
Let us consider a situation in which both the SLS and SS1 functions are parameterized.
In this case, the formula for the resulting frequency tolerance ∆Flow is as follows:
∆Flow ≥ m/D - ∆F
∆Flow ≥ 20 [Hz/s]/10 [Hz] - 1.5 [Hz]
∆Flow ≥ 0.5 [Hz]
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 201
● Delay ∆Fdelay
Please note that ∆Flow and ∆Fhigh are capable of assuming both negative values and a
value of 0. Therefore, it is important to compare ∆Fdelay with 0 and to determine the
maximum value.
The formula is as follows:
∆Fdelay = max [∆Flow, ∆Fhigh, 0] = max [0.5 [Hz], 6 [Hz], 0] = 6 [Hz]
● Minimum delay of braking ramp
The minimum delay of braking ramp is calculated as follows:
P9680 ≥ ∆Fdelay/m
P9680 ≥ 6 [Hz]/20 [Hz/s]
P9680 ≥ 0.3 [s]
Parameter P9680 must be set to 300 [ms].
Thus, the results of our calculations are as follows:
Upper tolerance range P9691 = 16.5 [Hz]
Minimum delay of braking ramp P9680 = 300 [ms]
Fail-Safe Functions
8.3 Limiting values for SS1 and SLS
Frequency converter
202 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Fault reaction time
A passivated STO is always triggered immediately after the parameterized safe envelope
frequency is exceeded. However, note that the output frequency may deviate (is usually
higher) from the set point frequency due to normal operating states (slip compensation, PID,
etc.) or internal drive faults.
Therefore, as the envelope starting frequency is related to the output frequency the
paramterized envelope may be shifted as shown in the next figure.
W
I
PD[LPXPDSSOLFDWLRQUHODWHG
UHDFKDEOHIUHTXHQF\)
PD[
UHDFKHG
IDXOWUHDFWLRQ
WLPH
˂W
UHDFWWLPH
HQYHORSH
GHOD\
˂W
HQYHORSH
VKLIWHGHQYHORSH
SDVVLYDWHG
672OLPLW
)
PD[
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
HQYH
ORSH
VKLIW
˂W
VKLIW
Figure 8-7 Maximum fault reaction time
The maximum envelope shift corresponds to the fault reaction time ∆treaction time (maximum
passivated STO limit) wich is given as:
ෙW
UHDFWLRQWLPH
)
PD[UHDFK
)
PD[
P
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 203
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Data
P0003, P0010
P9603/P9803, bit 04, bit 05 or bit 07 (PROFIsafe)
Parameter range:
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
Safe Torque Off (STO) is the simplest fail-safe function and its purpose is to safely remove
any torque from the motor. Once the motor is at a standstill, STO triggers a switch-on lock
which prevents the inverter from restarting the motor. Shutting down the triggering pulses of
the Power Module effectively causes the motor to coast down. The mechanical brake is
closed immediately if connected.
If Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed
When the STO function is initiated the inverter performs the following actions:
1. The triggering pulses on the Power Module are disabled.
2. The mechanical brake is closed immediately (if connected).
3. The status LED STO starts flashing.
4. The status LED ES is switched on, indicating the end-of-state has been reached.
When the STO signal is removed the inverter performs the following actions:
Note
The pulse-lock must be released by applying a rising edge signal (OFF1/ON).
1. The process dynamization is always carried out.
2. The forced dynamization procedure is carried out (if parametrized by P9601 and P9801).
3. The forced dynamization timer (P9660) is reset to the value in P9659 (if the forced
dynamization procedure was carried out successfully).
4. The safe brake control opens the brake, if not closed by holding brake function (P1215).
5. The status LED STO is switched on and ES is switched off.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Frequency converter
204 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
These actions are shown in the figure below.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
drive coasts down
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
Activation
of STO
Deactivation
of STO
frequency
time
Starting drive
via OFF1/ON
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-8 Safe Torque Off function
Note
The state of the fail-safe functions is announced by r9772.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an STO is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
An internal failure during an STO will be detected within 20 ms and leads immediately to a
passivated STO.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 205
Passivated Safe Torque Off (passivated STO)
The passivated STO is always initiated when a detected fault requires, that the drive must be
brought to a standstill. The drive can be returned to operation only when the fault has been
explicitly acknowledged and a forced dynamization procedure has been carried out.
The passivated STO state is left by the following procedure:
1. Turning the drive off by sending an OFF1-signal.
2. Acknowledging all active faults.
3. Sending an ON-signal after the dynamization procedure was carried out successfully.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
Activation of
passivated STO
Deactivation of
passivated STO
- set OFF1
- Acknowledge
frequency
time
Starting drive via
- ON
fault
drive coasts down
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-9 Passivated STO function
Fail-Safe Functions
8.4 Safe Torque Off
Frequency converter
206 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
CAUTION
After STO or passivated STO it is possible (but almost unlikely) that the field generating
components become faulty in a way that they will generate one single rising edge of a
rotating field causing the motor to jerk for a defined maximum electrical angle of 60 °.
The resulting rotating angle at the motor shaft is smaller than the maximum electrical
angle due to inertia and the number of pole pairs.
Note
A passivated STO is always initiated by a safety fault condition within the drive.
Therefore, the drive always performs a forced dynamization procedure before it is
allowed to restart.
The passivated STO function has the highest priority and cannot be intercepted by any
other function.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 207
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Data
P0003, P0010
P9603/P9803, bit 02, bit 03 or bit 07 (PROFIsafe)
P9680/P9880
P9681/P9881
P9682/P9882
Parameter range:
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
Contrary to STO, the output frequency of the inverter has an influence on the behavior of the
SS1 (Safe Stop 1) function. When SS1 is initiated the output frequency of the inverter is
scanned, if it is lower than the minimum frequency for standstill detection set in
P9682/P9882, the STO function is initiated immediately to bring the motor to a standstill. If
the inverter output frequency is higher than the minimum frequency for standstill detection,
then the motor is slowed down using the safe braking-ramp time set in P9681 and P9881.
See figure below.
The SS1 function can be intercepted by one of the following commands:
● Passivated STO
● Safe Torque Off (STO)
● OFF2 (SS1 monitoring still active)
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Frequency converter
208 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
drive coasts down
Activation
of SS1
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
STO
activated
Deactivation
of SS1
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
frequency
time
Starting drive
via OFF1/ON
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-10 Safe Stop 1 (SS1) function
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 209
CAUTION
The frequency setpoint can increase related to the following functions
PID Trim
Vdc max controller
only active in conjunction with V/f control
Slip compensation
Resonance damping
Imax
As the frequency is monitored after adding these values, this increase should be taken into
account by the user when parameterizing the safe frequency envelope.
+ + + - +
3,'DVWULP 3
6OLS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
3
5HVRQDQFH
GDPSLQJ
,PD[
)UHTXHQF\
PRQLWRULQJ
3
9GFPD[
FRQWUROOHU
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
IURP5)*
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQWWR
3RZHU
VWDFN$6,&
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Frequency converter
210 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
When SS1 is activated, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
1. Both shutdown paths initiate a fail-safe monitored brake ramp function.
2. The motor is slowed down by the safe brake ramp function.
3. The status LED SS1 starts flashing.
4. When the minimum speed for standstill detection is reached, the STO function is
activated.
5. The mechanical brake is closed (if connected).
6. The status LED ES is switched on.
The SS1 function can be interrupted by either an OFF2 command or the STO function.
When SS1 is deactivated before the "minimum speed for standstill detection" (P9682/P9882)
is reached, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
1. The monitoring of the output frequency is deactivated.
2. The drive accelerates to the frequency setpoint
3. The status LED SS1 changes from flashing to on state.
When SS1 is deactivated after the "minimum speed for standstill detection" (P9682/P9882)
is reached, the following actions are performed by the inverter:
Note
The pulse-lock must be released by applying a rising edge signal (OFF1/ON).
1. STO is deactivated.
2. The forced dynamisation procedure is carried out (if parameterized by P9601/P9801).
3. The forced dynamisation timer (P9660) is reset to the value in P9659 (if the forced
dynamisation procedure was carried out successfully).
4. The brake opens, if it is not held closed due to motor holding brake state.
5. The status LED SS1 changes from flashing to on state.
6. The status LED ES is switched off.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.5 Safe Stop 1
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 211
Note
The state of the fail-safe functions is announced by r9772.
Note
The fail-safe function SS1 should not be activated during following processes are active:
Search process in flying restart
Motor data identification
Speed control optimization
It is recommended not to use the torque control (P1300 = 22, 23 or P1501 > 0) as a
control mode for the fail-safe function SS1.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an SS1 is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
The reaction times after failure occurred until the passivated STO is triggered must be
given in the user manual:
Fault reaction time during STO:
During an STO an internal failure is detected within 20 ms by the inverter which
immediately triggers a passivated STO.
Fault reaction time during SS1 and SLS:
During an SS1 and an SLS the internal failure detection time is related to the inverter
output frequency. A failure is always detected when the monitored stator frequency
at the inverter output exceeds the safe frequency envelope. The first frequency
measurement value which lies outside the safe area triggers a passivated STO. The
maximum reaction time for a passivated STO during SS1 and SLS is 8 ms, whereas
the inverter can reach a maximum speed of 650 Hz before shutting down. However,
this speed can only be reached for one half frequency cycle.
E.g. the maximum reaction time at 650 Hz is 8 ms + 1/650 Hz/2 = 8.7 ms, the
maximum reaction time at 10 Hz is 8 ms + 1/10 Hz/2 = 58 ms.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
212 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Data
Parameter range: P0003, P0010
P9603/P9803, bit 00, bit 01 or bit 07 (PROFIsafe)
P9680/P9880
P9681/P9881
P9690/P9890
P9691/P9891
P9692/P9892
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616
Description
The purpose of the Safely Limited Speed (SLS) function is to monitor the output frequency to
ensure that it does not exceed the SLS monitoring set by parameters P9691 and P9891.
Should the SLS monitoring be exceeded a braking process will be initiated which is
monitored using the safe braking ramp function. If a stationary state is detected, the
passivated STO will be initiated to bring the motor to a safe standstill. If the braking functions
fail, which is detected as a fault, the passivated STO function is initiated and cannot be
cleared without explicit acknowledgment of the fault.
The SLS function can be intercepted by the following commands:
● Safe Torque Off (STO)
● Safe Stop 1 (SS1)
● OFF1
● OFF2
● OFF3
Details see section "Dependency of Failsafe and OFF commands"
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 213
If the standard OFF commands are used with fail-safe functions, the interaction of the
commands on the system are automatically monitored in the background by the fail-safe
system (e.g. the commands, which are not fail-safe, cannot cause the inverter to accelerate
in an unsafe way as the passivated STO function will be triggered automatically).
Note
The fail-safe function SLS should not be activated during following processes are active:
Search process in flying restart
Motor data identification
Speed control optimization
It is recommended not to use the torque control (P1300 = 22, 23 or P1501 > 0) as a control
mode for the fail-safe function SLS.
CAUTION
Reaction time
The reaction time for an SLS is 20 ms.
Fault reaction time
The reaction times after failure occurred until the passivated STO is triggered must be
given in the user manual:
Fault reaction time during STO:
During an STO an internal failure is detected within 20 ms by the inverter which
immediately trig-gers a passivated STO.
Fault reaction time during SS1 and SLS:
During an SS1 and an SLS the internal failure detection time is related to the inverter
output frequency. A failure is always detected when the monitored stator frequency at
the inverter output exceeds the safe frequency envelope. The first frequency
measurement value which lies outside the safe area triggers a passivated STO. The
maximum reaction time for a passivated STO during SS1 and SLS is 8 ms, whereas the
inverter can reach a maximum speed of 650 Hz before shutting down. However, this
speed can only be reached for one half frequency cycle.
E.g. the maximum reaction time at 650 Hz is 8 ms + 1/650 Hz/2 = 8.7 ms, the maximum
reaction time at 10 Hz is 8 ms + 1/10 Hz/2 = 58 ms.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
214 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Modes of behavior
The SLS function has four modes of behavior giving the user a choice of functionality to suit
their specific application. These modes of behavior of the SLS function are controlled by
setting the required values in parameters P9692 and P9892.
CAUTION
Due to monitoring reasons, the so called "accuracy limit for SLS" with a value of 1 Hz is set.
If - in SLS mode 0, 1 or 2 - the output frequency under-runs this value, an STO is triggered
immediately. In SLS mode 3 a 5-s timer starts and after that an STO will be triggered if the
frequency is still below 1 Hz.
WARNING
If due to dynamic loads the frequency runs above the SLS limit (P9691/P9891) a
passivated STO is triggered; if it falls below the accuracy limit in case of SLS 0, 1 or 2 an
STO is triggered immediately, in case of SLS mode 3 it will be triggered, if after 5 s the
frequency is still below 1 Hz. Therefore when designing the plant, dynamic load changes
must be taken into account to prevent an unintented activation of fail-safe functions.
Furthermore the acceptance test should be performed under worst-case load conditions.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 215
CAUTION
In SLS modes 0 and 1, the frequency setpoint can increase related to the following
functions
PID Trim
Vdc max controller
only active in conjunction with V/f control
Slip compensation
Resonance damping
Imax
As the frequency is monitored after adding these values, this increasement should be taken
into account by the user when parameterising the safe frequency envelope.
+ + + - +
3,'DVWULP 3
6OLS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
3
5HVRQDQFH
GDPSLQJ
,PD[
)UHTXHQF\
PRQLWRULQJ
3
9GFPD[
FRQWUROOHU
)UHH]HVDIHW\
IUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
IURP5)*
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQWWR
3RZHU
VWDFN$6,&
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
216 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
8.6.1 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 0
SLS Mode 0, P9692 = P9892 = 0
If, after initiation of SLS, the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set with P9691
and P9891, then the passivated STO function is initiated to bring the motor to a standstill.
If the output frequency is below the SLS monitoring, all control signals that can affect the
output frequency are blocked. No external control of the output frequency is possible.
Once the output frequency is locked at its present value, if the motor again falls below this
frequency (for example additional load on the motor), it is not interpreted as a fault condition
and no action is taken. See the following table.
If the Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
During SLS mode 0 is active the fault reaction time for a passivated STO is given according
to the formula:
5HDFWLRQWLPH PV
I
RXW
Output frequency = fout
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 217
SLS Mode 0, case 1: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Monitored ramp down to SLS setpoint
When SLS setpoint is reached => SLS monitoring on
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
Frequency setpoint activated
SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
SLS setpoint
reached
Envelope
monitored ramp
(leading to SLS setpoint)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-11 SLS Mode 0, case 1: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS
setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
218 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 0, case 2: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
When SLS setpoint is reached => SLS monitoring on
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
Frequency setpoint activated
SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-12 SLS Mode 0, case 2: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 219
SLS Mode 0, case 3: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency setpoint > accuracy
limit
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
When SLS setpoint is reached => SLS monitoring on
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
Frequency setpoint activated
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-13 SLS Mode 0, case 3: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency
setpoint > accuracy limit
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
220 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 0, cases 1 to 3:
If output frequency increases SLS tolerance (e.g. due to trim or slip
compensation) =>
passivated STO is triggered
SF-LED on
STO-LED off
SS1-LED off
SLS-LED off
Deactivation of SLS =>
No action
To start again, the passivated STO must be acknowledged and a new
on command is necessary to ramp up to frequency setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
STO
activated
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
fault
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-14 SLS Mode 0, cases 1 to 3
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 221
SLS Mode 0, case 4: Accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
STO activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
Frequency setpoint activated
SLS-LED on
ES-LED off
To start again, STO must be acknowledged and a new ON command is
necessary to ramp up to frequency setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
STO (drive coasts down)
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Starting drive
via OFF1/ON
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-15 SLS Mode 0, case 4: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
222 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 0, case 5.1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Monitored ramp down to standstill
detection
When standstill detection is
reached =>
passivated STO activated
Deactivation of SLS => To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
LED
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
monitored ramp
(leading to passivated STO)
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
STO
activated
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
fault
SLS setpoint
reached
SLS
monitoring
reached
Envelope
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
Figure 8-16 SLS Mode 0, case 5.1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary
fault
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 223
SLS Mode 0, case 5.2: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891,) secondary
fault
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Monitored ramp down to standstill
detection
When output frequency runs
above SS1 ramp down monitoring
before standstill detection is
reached
Frequency setpoint inactive
passivated STO activated immediately
Deactivation of SLS => To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
STO
activated
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
fault
SLS
monitoring
reached
Envelope
monitored ramp
(leading to passivated STO)
fault
(secondary)
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-17 SLS Mode 0, case 5.2: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), secondary
fault
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
224 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Note
It must be taken into account that with detecting a fault during the fail-safe function SLS
mode 0 is active, first it will be tried to brake down the drive at the safe brake ramp.
The brake time is determined by parameters P9681/P9881. As the drive at this time is in a
fail-safe mode, it is not possible to interrupt the braking ramp by another function (e.g. STO).
It is recommended to parameterize the shortest possible ramp time for the application.
8.6.2 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 1
SLS Mode 1, P9692 = P9892 = 1
In addition to the speed limit set in parameters P9691 and P9891, a further SLS setpoint can
be set in parameters P9690 and P9890. This additional SLS setpoint is used to set the
output frequency to a specific frequency, instead of bringing the motor to a standstill.
If the output frequency of the inverter falls below the SLS setpoint set in P9690 and P9890,
the motor is allowed to run at that speed. See the following table.
If Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 225
SLS Mode 1, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891)
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Ramp down with SS1 to standstill
detection
When SLS setpoint is reached => SLS monitoring on
ES-LED on
Deactivation of SLS => To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
SLS setpoint
reached
SLS
monitoring
reached
Envelope
monitored ramp
(leading to SLS setpoint)
Figure 8-18 SLS Mode 1, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891)
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
226 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 1, case 2: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Ramp down with SS1 to SLS setpoint
When SLS setpoint is reached => SLS monitoring on
ES-LED on
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
activate freq. setpoint and ramp to freq.
setpoint
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
SLS setpoint
reached
Envelope
monitored ramp
(leading to SLS setpoint)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-19 SLS Mode 1, case 2: SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891) > Frequency setpoint > SLS
setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 227
SLS Mode 1, case 3: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
activate freq. setpoint and ramp to freq.
setpoint
LED
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Figure 8-20 SLS Mode 1, case 3: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882)
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
228 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 1, case 4: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency setpoint > accuracy
limit
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
activate freq. setpoint and ramp to freq.
setpoint
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-21 SLS Mode 1, case 4: Standstill detection (p9682/p9882) > Frequency
setpoint > accuracy limit
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 229
SLS Mode 1, case 5: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED and ES-LED off
activate freq. setpoint and ramp to freq.
setpoint
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
STO (drive coasts down)
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Starting drive
via OFF1/ON
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-22 SLS Mode 1, case 5: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
230 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 1, case 6: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
STO activated
SLS-LED flashing
ES-LED on
Frequency setpoint deactivated
Deactivation of SLS => To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
STO
activated
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
fault
Envelope
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-23 SLS Mode 1, case 6: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring (p9691/p9891), primary fault
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 231
SLS Mode 1, case 7: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882), primary fault
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Frequency setpoint deactivated
When output frequency runs
above SLS monitoring
passivated STO activated immediately
Deactivation of SLS => To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new on command
is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
STO
activated
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
SLS setpoint
(P9690, P9890)
Standstill detection
(P9682, P9882)
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
fault
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-24 SLS Mode 1, case 7: SLS setpoint > Frequency setpoint > standstill detection
(p9682/p9882), primary fault
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
232 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
8.6.3 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 2
SLS Mode 2, P9692 = P9892 = 2
In SLS mode 2, only the monitoring ramp (envelope) is activated.
WARNING
Safe brake ramp not activated
SLS mode 2 means that the safe brake ramp is not activated, therefore it is the users
responsibility to ensure that the motor is ramped down to or below the SLS setpoint.
Note
If in the SLS mode 2 one of the functions Pre-Control (P1496 > 0), VC or SLVC (P1300 > 19)
is active, dynamic setpoint jumps can lead to a passivated STO.
If the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set in P9691 and P9891, the motor must
be ramped down using an external control channel (e.g. a PLC, potentiometer or USS etc.).
If the control channel tries to set the output frequency to exceed the SLS monitoring, this will
be interpreted as a fault condition and the motor will be stopped and passivated. To start the
motor again, the fault condition needs to be explicitly acknowledged. See the following table.
If the Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 233
SLS Mode 2, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-, STO- and SS1-LED off
passivated STO is triggered
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new ON
command is necessary to ramp up to
frequency setpoint.
fault
LED
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Activation
of SLS
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Frequency
setpoint
Output
frequency Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
Figure 8-25 SLS Mode 2, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
234 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 2, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED off
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Figure 8-26 SLS Mode 2, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 235
SLS Mode 2, case 3: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
If frequency setpoint falls below accuracy limit, a passivated STO is triggered
immediately
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED off
To start again, the passivated STO must
be acknowledged and a new ON
command is necessary to ramp up to
frequency setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
STO
activated
Starting drive
via OFF1/ON
STO (drive coasts down)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-27 SLS Mode 2, case 3: accuracy limit > Frequency setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
236 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 2, case 4: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
If frequency setpoint runs above SLS monitoring an STO is triggered
immediately
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
To start again, STO must be
acknowledged and a new ON command is
necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
STO
activated
fault
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-28 SLS Mode 2, case 4: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 237
8.6.4 Safely Limited Speed, Mode 3
SLS Mode 3, P9692 = P9892 = 3
Mode 3 is similar to mode 2. Contrary to mode 2 reversing of direction is possible as well as
starting with an ON command while SLS Mode 3 monitoring is active.
WARNING
Safe brake ramp not activated
In mode 3 the safe brake ramp is not activated. Therefore it is the users responsibility to
ensure that the motor is ramped down to or below the SLS setpoint
Note
If in the SLS mode 3 one of the functions Pre-Control (P1496 > 0), VC or SLVC (P1300 > 19)
is active, dynamic setpoint jumps can lead to a passivated STO.
If the output frequency exceeds the SLS monitoring set in P9691 and P9891, the motor must
be ramped down using an external control channel (e.g. a PLC, potentiometer or USS etc.).
If the control channel tries to set the output frequency to exceed the SLS monitoring, this will
be interpreted as a fault condition and the motor will be stopped and passivated. To start the
motor again, the fault condition needs to be explicitly acknowledged. See the following table.
If the Safe Brake Control is activated, its status is indicated in the following figures via
r9772.14:
● r9772.14 = 0 -> brake open
● r9772.14 = 1 -> brake closed.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
238 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 3, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-, STO- and SS1-LED off
passivated STO is triggered
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
To start again, the passivated STO must be acknowledged
and a new ON command is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
fault
LED
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.13
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Activation
of SLS
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Frequency
setpoint
Output
frequency Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
Figure 8-29 SLS Mode 3, case 1: Frequency setpoint > SLS monitoring
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 239
SLS Mode 3, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED off
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.13
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
Figure 8-30 SLS Mode 3, case 2: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint > accuracy limit
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
240 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 3, case 3: activation of SLS, followed by an OFF1/OFF3 command =>
Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit => STO, followed by
deactivation of SLS and renewed activation of SLS => restart requires
ON command
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
OFF1/OFF3 command Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit
STO activated if frequency drops below accuracy limit
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
SLS-LED off
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
To start again, a new ON command is necessary. If - after 5 s -
the output frequency is above accuracy limit the inverter
operates in SLS mode 3 otherwise an STO will be triggered
immediately.
V
672%LW
66%LW
6/6%LW
U
U
U
6)
672
66
6/6
(6
V
$FWLYDWLRQ
RI6/6
$FWLYDWLRQ
RI6/6
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
6/6PRQLWRULQJ
33
'HDFWLYDWLRQ
RI6/6
$FFXUDF\OLPLW
+]
IUHTXHQF\
WLPH
(QYHORSH (QYHORSH
2))2))
&RPPDQG
21
&RPPDQG
672
DFWLYDWHG
+]
6WDWXV
ZRUG
352),VDIH
VWDWH
/('
7LPHU
DFWLYDWHG
Figure 8-31 SLS Mode 3, case 3: Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit after activation of SLS
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 241
SLS Mode 3, case 4: activation of SLS, followed by an OFF1/OFF3 command =>
Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit => STO, followed by
activation and deactivation of STO through the user => restart
requires ON command
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
OFF1/OFF3 command Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit
STO activated if frequency drops below accuracy limit
Activation of STO => SLS monitoring still activated
Envelope still activated
Deactivation of STO => STO is deactivated
Timer is started
To start again, a new ON command is necessary. If - after 5 s -
the output frequency is above accuracy limit the inverter
operates in SLS mode 3 otherwise an STO will be triggered
immediately.
V
672%LW
66%LW
6/6%LW
U
U
U
6)
672
66
6/6
(6
V
$FWLYDWLRQ
RI6/6
'HDFWLYDWLRQRI
672
2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
)UHTXHQF\
VHWSRLQW
6/6PRQLWRULQJ
33
$FWLYDWLRQRI
672
$FFXUDF\OLPLW
+]
IUHTXHQF\
WLPH
(QYHORSH
2))2))
&RPPDQG
21
&RPPDQG
672
DFWLYDWHG
+]
6WDWXV
ZRUG
352),VDIH
VWDWH
/('
7LPHU
DFWLYDWHG
Figure 8-32 SLS Mode 3, case 4: Frequency setpoint drops below accuracy limit with user activation of STO
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
242 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 3, case 5: Activation of SLS with SLS monitoring > frequency setpoint >
accuracy limit - followed by setpoint inversion
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
Setpoint inversion, with |SLS monitoring| > |fsetnew| > |accuracy limit|. If it takes 5 s or more
from accuracy limit (1 Hz) to the inverse accuracy limit (-1Hz) the inverter trips, otherwise it
will operate without tripping.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.13
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
t < 5 s
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
-SLS monitoring
(-P9691, -P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
Accuracy limit
-1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
New
setpoint
0 Hz
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-33 SLS Mode 3, case 5: Activation of SLS with zero crossing
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 243
SLS Mode 3, case 6: Activation of SLS with SLS monitoring > frequency setpoint >
accuracy limit - followed by new setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
New setpoint. If the new setpoint is below the accuracy limit a 5 s timer starts. If the setpoint
is still below the accuracy limit the inverter trips with STO.
= 5 s
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.13
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Envelope
New
setpoint
< 1 Hz
act freq
< Acc lim
Starting Drive via
OFF1 /ON
STO
activated
0 Hz
Figure 8-34 SLS Mode 3, case 6: New setpoint (< accuracy limit) after activation of SLS
Fail-Safe Functions
8.6 Safely Limited Speed
Frequency converter
244 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
SLS Mode 3, case 7: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Activation of SLS => SLS monitoring activated
SLS-LED flashing
If frequency setpoint runs above SLS monitoring an STO is triggered immediately
Deactivation of SLS => SLS monitoring off
To start again, passivated STO must be acknowledged and a
new ON command is necessary to ramp up to frequency
setpoint.
STO (Bit 0.0)
SS1 (Bit 0.1)
SLS (Bit 0.4)
r9772.8
r9772.13
r9772.14
SF
STO
SS1
SLS
ES
Activation
of SLS
Output
frequency
Frequency
setpoint
SLS monitoring
(P9691, P9891)
Deactivation
of SLS
Accuracy limit
1 Hz
frequency
time
Envelope
STO
activated
fault
Starting drive via
- OFF1
- acknowledge
- ON
passivated STO
(drive coasts down)
Status-
word PROFIsafe
state
LED
Figure 8-35 SLS Mode 3, case 7: SLS monitoring > Frequency setpoint
Fail-Safe Functions
8.7 Safe Brake Control
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 245
8.7 Safe Brake Control
Data
P0003, P0010, P1215
P9601/P9801
P9602/P9802
Parameter range:
P9761, P9799/P9899, r9798/r9898, P3900
Warnings A1691, A1692, A1696, A1699
Faults F1600, F1616, F1630
Description
The Safe Brake Control Function (SBC) was implemented to generate a fail-safe signal to
control an EM brake.
Prerequisite: P1215 = 1 and the optional Safe Brake Control Relay
To activate the Safe Brake Control function, the following parameters must be set:
P9602 = P9802 = 1 (factory setting is 0).
In case of P9602 = P9802 = 1 a feedback signal of the Safe Brake Control is monitored. This
tests the signal circuitry not the EM brake itself.
This test signal does not interfere with the normal function of the mechanical brake. If the
mechanical brake is fitted and the test fails, a fault condition will be indicated by the inverter.
Note
When carrying-out the forced dynamization, the shutdown paths of the motor brake are also
tested. This results a brief opening command (2 ms to 28 ms) in the motor brake.
The mechanical part of the brake generally requires longer than 30 ms to open. This means
that this dynamic operation generally has no influence on the motor shaft itself. However it is
the user's responsibility to use brakes with opening times > 30 ms.
The SBC will be activated in the following cases:
● STO
● passivated STO
● SS1
The SBC state is indicated in r9772.14. If SBC is disabled by P9602 = P9802 = 0 then
r9772.14 is 0 (brake open) even if the brake is closed from a non-safe brake control (e.g.
MHB). The fault F1630 will occur in case an error happens.
Fail-Safe Functions
8.7 Safe Brake Control
Frequency converter
246 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 247
Power module dependent functions 9
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Overview
The inverters have three electronic braking technologies:
● DC braking
● Compound braking
These brakes can actively brake the motor and avoid a possible DC link overvoltage
condition. The figure below shows the inter-dependency of the electronic braking functions.
'&EUDNLQJ
3!
"
'&EUDNLQJ
HQDEOHG
&RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
HQDEOHG
'\QDPLFEUDNLQJ
HQDEOHG 'LVDEOHG
&RPSRXQG
EUDNLQJ
3!
"
'\QDPLF
EUDNLQJ
3!
"
QR QR QR
\HV \HV \HV
Figure 9-1 Inter-dependency of electronic brakes
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
248 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
9.1.1 DC braking
Data
P1230, P1233
P1232, P1234
Parameter range:
r0053 Bit00
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
The motor decelerates along a parameterized braking ramp if an OFF1 or OFF3 command is
output. A "flat" ramp must be selected so that the inverter is not tripped (shutdown) due to
the high regenerative energy which would cause a DC link overvoltage condition. The DC
brake should be activated while the OFF1 or OFF3 command is present if the motor is to be
braked faster. For DC braking, instead of continually reducing the output frequency/voltage
during the OFF1 or OFF3 phase, from a selectable frequency, a DC voltage/current is input
(refer to sequence 1).
The motor can be brought to a standstill in the shortest time using DC current braking (DC
brake). DC braking is selected as follows:
● After OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233) ‒ Sequence 1
● Directly selected using BICO parameter P1230 ‒ Sequence 2
For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a significant
braking torque for an induction motor. The magnitude, duration and frequency at which
braking starts can be set for the braking current and therefore braking torque by setting the
appropriate parameters. The DC brake can therefore support a braking operation from
approx. < 10 Hz or prevents / minimizes the increase in the DC link voltage for regenerative
braking. This is realized because energy is directly absorbed in the motor. The essential
advantage and the main application of the DC brake is the fact that a holding torque can be
generated at standstill (0 Hz). For instance, this is important forapplications where after
positioning, any motion in the mechanical system / product itself can result in waste.
DC braking is especially used for:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
● Conveyor belts
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 249
Sequence 1
1. Enabled using P1233
2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (see figure below)
3. The inverter frequency is ramped down along the parameterized OFF1 or OFF3 ramp
down to the frequency at which DC braking is to start - P1234. This means that the kinetic
energy of the motor can be reduced without endangering the inverter. However, if the
ramp-down time is too short, there is a danger that a fault will be output as a result of an
overvoltage condition in DC link - F0002.
4. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
5. The required braking current P1232 is then impressed for the selected braking time
P1233. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.
_I_
3
U
%LW
3
3
W
W
W
W
2))
2))2))
21
2))
'&EUDNLQJ
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
Figure 9-2 DC braking after OFF1/OFF3
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
250 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Sequence 2
1. Enabled and selected using BICO parameter P1230 (see figure below).
2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed as long as DC braking is enabled
(P1230 = 1) and the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the motor accelerates back to the setpoint
frequency until the motor speed matches the inverter output frequency. If there is no
match, then there is danger that a fault will be output as a result of overcurrent - F0001.
This can be avoided by activating the flying restart function.
5. If any fault occurs during P1230 = 1 the DC current is set to zero. The motor doesn't ramp
up even the fault is acknowledged. A new ON command is necessary.
6. If the DC brake is enabled again, the braking current P1232 is impressed as long as
P1230 = 1.
.
W
W
W
W
W
IBVHW
IBDFW
3 3
3&
I
I
L
U
%LW
W
2
)DXOWVWDWH
%,(QDEOH'&%UDNH
'&EUDNLQJ '&EUDNLQJ
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
1RWH'&EUDNHFDQEHDSSOLHGLQGULYHVWDWHVU RU
$FNQRZOHGJH
21
Figure 9-3 DC braking after external selection
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 251
Note
1. The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors!
2. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads!
3. For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in
the motor. The motor can overheat if braking lasts too long!
4. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the motor speed using an
external control. When parameterizing and setting the motor system, then as far as
possible, it should be tested using real loads!
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
252 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
9.1.2 Compound braking
Data
Parameter range: P1236
Warnings: -
Faults: -
Function chart number: -
Description
For compound braking (this is enabled using P1236) DC braking is superimposed with
regenerative braking (where the motor regenerates into the line supply as it brakes along a
ramp). If the DC link voltage exceeds the compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp (see figure
below), then a DC current is impressed as a function of P1236. In this case, braking is
possible with a controlled (closed-loop) motor frequency and minimum regenerative
feedback. Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by
optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for
OFF3) and using compound braking P1236.
_I_ _I_
IBVHW IBVHW
IBDFW IBDFW
WW
W
WW
W
LL
9
'&OLQN
9
'&OLQN
9
'&&RPS
3 9
'&&RPS
෬෭෬3
3ำ9
'&&RPS
෬U
3
:LWKRXW&RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
3!
:LWK&RPSRXQGEUDNLQJ
Figure 9-4 Compound braking
Power module dependent functions
9.1 Electronic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 253
The compound braking switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is calculated as a function of parameter
P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels) either directly using the line supply voltage P0210
or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242 (refer to the formula in the figure above).
WARNING
For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking
along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and motor
load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. This can cause the motor to overheat if
this power loss is too high or if the brake operation takes too long!
Note
Only active in conjunction with V/f control.
Compound braking is deactivated, if:
flying restart is active,
DC braking is active, and
Vector control is selected.
The compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is dependent on P1254:
VDC-Comp(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC-Comp(P1254 ≠ 0)
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
254 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Overview
The inverters have two dynamic braking technologies:
● Chopper resistor
● Regenerative braking
Power Module functions
Table 9- 1 Power Module relating functions
SINAMCIS G120 SINAMICS G120D
PM240 PM250 PM260 PM250D
Dynamic braking via
chopper resistor
X --- --- ---
Dynamic braking via
regenerative braking
--- X X X
9.2.1 Dynamic braking
Data
Parameter range: P1237
Warnings: A0535
Faults: F0022
Function chart number: -
Description
For several motor applications, in certain operating states, the motor can regenerate.
Examples of these applications include:
● Cranes
● Traction motors
● Conveyor belts which transport loads downwards.
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 255
When the motor is in the regenerative mode, the energy from the motor is fed back into the
DC link of the motor through the inverter. This means that the DC link voltage increases and
when the maximum threshold is reached, the inverter is shutdown (tripped) with fault F0002.
This shutdown (trip) can be avoided by using dynamic braking. Contrary to DC and
compound braking, this technique requires that an external braking resistor is installed.
The advantages of dynamic resistor braking include:
● The regenerative energy is not converted into heat in the motor.
● It is significantly more dynamic and can be used in all operating states (not only when an
OFF command is output).
a a
a
* '&35 '&35
&KRSSHUUHVLVWRU
&KRSSHU
FRQWURO
Figure 9-5 Connecting the chopper (braking) resistor
The braking energy in the DC link is converted into heat when dynamic braking is activated
(enabled using P1237). The energy is converted into heat using the voltage-controlled
chopper resistor (ballast resistor). When regenerative energy is fed back to the DC link and
in consequence the DC link threshold VDC, Chopper is exceeded, then the chopper resistor is
switched in using an electronic semiconductor switch.
Switch-in threshold of the chopper resistor:
If P1254 = 0:
0210P213.1V213.1V plysuplineChopper,DC ⋅⋅=⋅⋅=
Otherwise:
1242r98.0V Chopper,DC ⋅=
The chopper switch-in threshold VDC chopper is calculated as a function of parameter P1254
(Auto detect VDC switch-on levels), either directly using the line supply voltage P0210 or
indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242.
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
256 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
ದ
9
'&DFW
ෙ9
ෙ9
9
W
&KRSSHU21
yW
&KRSSHU
[
[
3
9
'&&KRSSHU
9 9 9
9 99
'XW\F\FOH
PRQLWRULQJ
$ODUP
$
0DLQV
Figure 9-6 Mode of operation of the dynamic braking
The regenerative (braking) energy is converted into thermal energy using the chopper
resistor. A braking module (chopper control) is integrated in the DC link for this purpose. The
chopper of the braking module switches the resistor with a mark-space ratio corresponding
to the regenerative power to be dissipated. The braking module is only active if, as a result of
the regenerative operation, the DC link voltage lies above the chopper switch-in threshold
VDC chopper. This means that the braking module is not active in normal operation when
motoring.
The chopper resistor is only designed for a specific power and a certain load duty cycle and
can only absorb a limited amount of braking energy within a specific time period. The
chopper resistors, specified in the catalog, have load duty cycle as shown in the figure
below.
W>V@
3
3
'%
3RZHU
3
'%
FRQWLQXRXVSRZHU
3
y3
'%
SHUPLVVDEOHSRZHUIRUVHYHU\V
Figure 9-7 Load duty cycle - chopper resistors
This load duty cycle is saved in the inverter for P1237 = 1 (→ 5 %). If the values are
exceeded due to the load required, then when the maximum acceptable braking energy is
reached, the load duty cycle monitoring controls the chopper so that the value is reduced to
the value entered in parameter P1237. This means that the energy to be dissipated in the
chopper resistor is reduced, which means that the DC link voltage quickly increases due to
the regenerative energy available and the inverter is shutdown (tripped) due to a DC link
overvoltage condition.
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 257
If the continuous power or the load duty cycle for a resistor is too high, then the continuous
rating can be quadrupled using four resistors in a bridge circuit configuration (see figure
below). In this case, in addition, the load duty cycle must be increased using parameter
P1237 from P1237 = 1 (→ 5 %) to P1237 = 3 (→ 20 %). When using the bridge circuit, the
overtemperature switch of the resistors should be connected in series and incorporated in
the fault circuit. This guarantes, that when a resistor overheats, the complete system/inverter
is shut down.
5
5 5
55
3
3
'&35 '&35 '&35 '&35
&KRSSHU
FRQWURO
&KRSSHU
FRQWURO
Figure 9-8 Increasing the level of braking energy which can be absorbed
The continuous power and the load duty cycle are modified using parameter P1237. If the
load duty cycle monitoring switches from the peak power (100 %) to the continuous power,
then this is dissipated for an unlimited length of time in the braking resistor. Contrary to the
braking resistor, as listed in the catalog, the chopper control can be permanently operated
with 100 % power.
D
E
W
3
3
3 W
F\FOH
W
W
3
W
F\FOH
W
2))
W
2))
W
2))
W
21
W
21
3
'%
3
'%
3
'%
W
,QILQLWH ,QILQLWH
Figure 9-9 Chopper load duty cycle
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
258 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The braking module is integrated in the inverter and the braking resistor can be connected
using the external terminals DC-P/R1 and R2 (for more details refer to Operating Instructions
of the corresponding Power Module). Where the DC-P/R1 is the positive terminal for the
braking resistor and R2 is the negative terminal for the braking resistor.
WARNING
Braking resistors, which are to be mounted on the inverter, must be designed so that they
can tolerate the power dissipated.
If an unsuitable braking resistor is used there is a danger of fire and that the associated
inverter will be significantly damaged.
The chopper control, integrated in the inverter is designed for the braking resistor value
assigned in Catalog; e.g.:
Power Module PM240 6SL3224-0BE24-0AA0
brake resistor 6SL3201-0BE12-0AA0
brake resistor value 160 Ω
A brake resistor with a lower resistance value will destroy the inverter. In this case, an
external braking unit must be used.
When operational, the temperature of braking resistors increases – do not touch! Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance around the unit and there is adequate ventilation.
A temperature protection switch must be used to protect the units against overheating.
Note
The switch-on threshold VDC chopper of the dynamic resistor braking is dependent on P1254
VDC chopper(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC chopper(P1254 ≠ 0).
External braking modules (chopper units) including braking resistor can be used with all of
the sizes of inverters. When engineering the system, the particular braking module/resistor
must be taken into consideration.
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 259
9.2.2 Regenerative braking
Data
P0640
P1082, P1531
Parameter range:
r1537
Faults: F0028
Function chart number: -
Description
For certain drive applications, the motor can operate as a generator in specific operating
states. Typical examples of these types of applications include:
● Cranes
● Traversing drives
● Conveyor belts where the material is being transported downwards
For regenerative motor operation, the motor energy is fed back into the line supply via the
inverter and the line-commutated rectifier of the inverter. The regenerative power capability
depends on the motor speed and on current or voltage limitation parameters.
The maximum regenerative power is limited to 100 % nominal power (HO) of the inverter. It
depends furthermore - especially at low frequencies - on the current limitation value (see
figure "Regenerative Power").
The advantages of regenerative braking include
● The kinetic energy is not converted into heat in the motor
● The kinetic energy does not have to be converted into heat in an external resistor
● It has a significantly higher dynamic response and can be used in all operating states (not
only for an OFF command)
● It allows precise braking along a down ramp
● Continuous regenerative operation is possible - e.g. for cranes
Regeneration with V/f control mode (P1300 < 20)
The regenerative power can be limited via P0640. If the regenerative power exceeds its limit
for more than 5 s the inverter will trip with F0028.
Regeneration with vector control mode
The regenerative power can be limited via P1531. If the regenerative power exceeds the limit
the drive will not be able to hold its setpoint.
Power module dependent functions
9.2 Dynamic Brakes
Frequency converter
260 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
The following graph shows the limiting parameters.
PD[UHJHQ
SRZHU
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QRUPDOL]HGSRZHUDQG
YROWDJHOLPLWDWLRQV
PRWRUUHJHQHUDWLYHYROWDJH
SURSRUWLRQDOVSHHG
UHJHQHUDWLYHSRZHU
GHSHQGLQJRQFXUUHQW
OLPLWDWLRQ
FXUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQ
%DVHVSHHG
RU+]
Figure 9-10 Regenerative Power
Note
If regenerative feedback into the line supply is required at the rated frequency the maximum
frequency (P1082) must be greater than the rated motor frequency (P0310).
CAUTION
If the power fed back into the line supply exceeds the rated power of the inverter, the
inverter will trip with F0028.
The customer must make sure that for his application the inverter is correctly rated based
on the regenerative power limit.
Power module dependent functions
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 261
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
9.3.1 Closed-loop Vdc control
Overview
In addition to DC, compound and dynamic braking, it is possible to prevent a DC link
overvoltage condition using the closed-loop DC link voltage controller. With this technique,
the output frequency is automatically modified during operation so that the motor does not go
too far into the regenerative mode.
Using the DC link voltage controller, it is also possible to prevent the inverter from being shut
down (tripped) during brief line supply dips – which cause a DC link undervoltage condition.
Also in this case, the output frequency is automatically modified by the DC link voltage
controller during operation. Contrary to an overvoltage condition, in this case the motor is
operated with increased regenerative operation in order to support and buffer the DC link
voltage.
DC link overvoltage
● Cause
The motor regenerates and feeds too much energy back into the DC link.
● Remedy
The DC link voltage is further reduced using the Vdc_max controller by reducing the
regenerative torque down to zero.
DC link undervoltage
● Cause:
Line supply voltage failure or dip (blackout or brownout)
● Remedy
A regenerative torque is entered for the operational motor which compensates the
existing losses and therefore stabilizes the voltage in the DC link. This technique is
carried-out using the Vdc_min controller and is known as kinetic buffering.
Power module dependent functions
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
Frequency converter
262 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
9.3.2 Vdc_max controller
Data
P1240, r0056 bit 14
r1242, P1243
Parameter range:
P1250 – P1254
Warnings: A0502, A0910, A0911
Faults: F0002
Function chart number: FP4600
Description
A brief regenerative load can be handled using this function (enabled using P1240) without
the inverter being shut down (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC link overvoltage"). In
this case, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop) so that the motor doesn't go too far into
regenerative operation.
If the inverter regenerates too much when braking the machine due to a fast ramp-down time
P1121, then the braking ramp/ramp time is automatically extended and the inverter is
operated at the DC link voltage limit r1242 (see figure below). If the DC link again falls below
the threshold r1242, then the Vdc_max controller withdraws the extension of the braking
ramp.
9'&
U
_I_
U%LW
$
IDFW
IVHW
W
W
W
9'&BPD[FRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
Figure 9-11 Vdc_max controller
On the other hand, if the Vdc_max controller increases the output frequency (e.g. for a
steady-state regenerative load), then the Vdc_max controller is disabled by an internal
inverter monitoring function and the warning A0910 is output. If the regenerative load
continues, the inverter is protected using fault F0002.
Power module dependent functions
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 263
In addition to controlling the DC link (closed-loop), the Vdc_max controller supports the
stabilizing processes of the speed at the end of an acceleration phase. This is especially the
case if there is an overshoot and the motor therefore briefly goes into regenerative operation
(damping effect).
Note
If the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 (switch-on level of Vdc_max.) of
the Vdc_max controller in the "Ready" state, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and
warning A0910 is output.
Cause:
The line supply voltage does not match the application situation
Remedy:
Refer to parameters P1254 and P0210.
If, in the "Run" state, the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 and if the
Vdc_max controller output is limited by parameter P1253 for approx. 200 ms, then the
Vdc_max controller is de-activated and the warning A0910 and, where relevant, fault F0002
are output.
Cause:
Line supply voltage P0210 or ramp-down time P1121 too low
The moment of inertia of the motor load is too high
Remedy:
Refer to parameters P1254, P0210, P1121
Use a braking resistor
9.3.3 Kinetic buffering
Data
P1240
r0056 bit 15
P1245, r1246, P1247
P1250
Parameter range:
P1256, P1257
Warnings: A0503
Faults: F0003
Function chart number: FP4600
Description
Brief line supply failures can be buffered using the kinetic buffering function (enabled using
P1240). Line supply failures are buffered using the kinetic energy (i.e. moments of inertia) of
the motor load. In this case the prerequisite is that the motor load has a sufficiently high
moment of inertia - i.e. has sufficient kinetic energy.
Power module dependent functions
9.3 DC Link Voltage Controller
Frequency converter
264 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Using this technique, the frequency is controlled (closed-loop), so that energy is fed to the
inverter from the regenerating motor thus covering the system losses. The losses during the
line supply failure still remain which means that the motor speed decreases. When using
kinetic buffering it has to be taken into consideration that the motor speed is reduced.
W
W
9
'&
U
%LW
3
9
GFBPLQ
3
3ຘຘ
3 ຘ
,
I
,
I
I
3
3
I
I
W
E
ຘ
W
W
E
3RZHUIDLOXUH
.,%DFWLYH
3RZHUUHVWRUDWLRQ
Figure 9-12 Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller)
When the line supply returns, the energy feed is again from the line side and the output
frequency of the inverter returns to the selected setpoint along the ramp defined by the
ramp-function generator.
Note
When the DC link voltage falls below the minimum VDC_min, fault F0003 "Undervoltage" is
output and the inverter is shut down. The shutdown threshold VDC_min depends on the
inverter type and line supply voltage.
The DC link undervoltage shutdown threshold is 430 V.
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 265
List of Abbreviations A
A.1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Table A- 1 Abbreviations
Abbreviations State
A
AC Alternating Current
A/D Analog digital converter
ADR Address
AFM Additional frequency modification
AG Automation Unit
AI Analog input
AK Request Identifier
AO Analog output
AOP Advanced operation panel
ASIC Application-specific integrated circuit
ASP Analog setpoint
ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation
B
BCC Block check character
BCD Binary-coded decimal code
BI Binector input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit
BICO Binector/connector
BO Binector output
BOP Basic Operator Panel
C
C Commissioning
CB Communication board
CCW Counter-clockwise
CDS Command data set
CE Communauté Européenne
CI Connector input
CM Configuration management
CMD Command
CO Connector output
CO/BO Connector output/Binector output
COM Common (terminal is connected to NO or NC)
List of Abbreviations
A.1 Abbreviations
Frequency converter
266 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Abbreviations State
CT Commissioning, ready to run
CU Control Unit
CUT Commissioning, run, ready to run
CW Clockwise
D
DAP Device Access Point
D/A Digital analog converter
DC Direct current
DDS Drive data set
DI Digital input
DIP DIP switch
DO Digital output
DP Distributed I/Os
DP-V1 Acyclic data transfer (extended PROFIBUS function)
DS Drive state
E
ECD Equivalent circuit diagram
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromagnetic force
ES Engineering System
FAQ Frequently asked question
F
Fast FFB Fast freely programmable function blocks
FB Function block
FCC Flux current control
FCL Fast current limiting
FF Fixed frequency
FFB Freely programmable function blocks
FOC Field orientated control
FREQ Frequency
FSA Frame size A
FSB Frame size B
FSC Frame size C
FSD Frame size D
FSE Frame size E
FSF Frame size F
G
GSD Device Data File (Geräte Stamm Datei)
GSG Getting Started Guide
GUI ID Global unique identifier
H
HIW Main actual value
List of Abbreviations
A.1 Abbreviations
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 267
Abbreviations State
HMI Human machine interface
HO High Overload (Constant Torque)
HSW Main setpoint
HTL High-voltage transistor logic
I
I/O In-/output
IBN Commissioning
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IND Sub-index
J
JOG JOG
K
KIB Kinetic buffering
L
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LGE Length
LO Light Overload (Variable Torque)
LWL Fiber Optic conductor
M
MHB Motor holding brake
MLP Multi-Language Pack
MOP Motor operated potentiometer
MMC Micro Memory Card
N
NC Normally closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NO Normally open
O
OLM Optical Link Module
OLP Optical Link Plug
OM Object Manager
OPI Operating Instructions
P
PAP Parameter Access Point
PID Proportional, integral, derivative controller
PKE Parameter ID
PKW Parameter channel (Parameter/Kennung/Wert)
PLC Programmable logic control
PM Power module
PM-IF Power module interface
PNU Parameter Number
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation
PPO Parameter process data object
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
List of Abbreviations
A.1 Abbreviations
Frequency converter
268 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Abbreviations State
PWE Parameter value
PWM Pulse-width modulation
Pxxxx Write parameter
PZD Process data area (Prozeßdaten)
Q
QC Quick commissioning
R
RAM Random-access memory
RCCB Residual current circuit breaker
RCD Residual current device
RFG Ramp-function generator
RFI Radio frequency interference
ROM Read-only memory
RPM Revolutions per minute
rxxxx read-only parameters of analogue signals
S
SBC Safe Break Control
SLVC Sensorless vector control
SLS Safe-Limited Speed
SOL Serial option link
SS1 Safe Stop 1
STO Safe Torque Off
STW Control word
STX Start of text
SVM Space vector modulation
T
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
U
USS Universal serial interface
V
V/f Voltage/frequency
VC Vector control
VT Variable torque
W
WEA Automatic restart
Z
ZSW Status word
ZUSW Additional setpoint
Frequency converter
Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD 269
Index
2
2-wire control, 153, 155
A
Analog inputs, 183
Analog outputs, 185
Automatic restart, 59
B
BICO parameterization, 180
BICO technology, 27
Binector Connector Technology, 27
brake
electro-mechanical, 74
instant, 80
motor holding, 75
C
Chip temperature, 50
Closed-loop control, 108
Closed-loop DC link voltage controller, 261
Closed-loop torque control, 143, 145
Compound braking, 252
Current limiting, 120, 150
D
Data sets, 66
DC braking, 248
DC link overvoltage, 261
DC link undervoltage, 261
Digital inputs, 178
Fixed frequencies, 161
Digital outputs, 181
Droop, 142
Dynamic brakes, 254
Dynamic braking, 254
dynamization
Forced, 194
Process, 195
Time controlled forced, 194
E
electro-mechanical brake, 74
Electronic brakes, 247
F
Fail-safe functions, 187
Fast FFB, 96
Fast free function blocks, 96
FFB, 96
Fixed frequencies, 161
Flying restart, 62
Flying restart with speed encoder, 64
Flying restart without speed encoder, 63
Forced dynamization, 194
Free function blocks, 96
frequency control
switch-over to torque control, 147
H
Heatsink temperature, 50
I
I_max controller, 120
i2t monitoring, 50
Inputs and outputs, 178
instant brake, 80
J
JOG, 41
K
Kinetic buffering, 263
L
Limiting the torque setpoint, 149
Line supply failure, 60
Index
Frequency converter
270 Function Manual, 08/2011 - FW 3.2, A5E01137279B AD
Line undervoltage, 60
Load torque monitoring, 47
M
Maximum fault reaction time, 196
Modification - frequency setpoint, 83
Monitoring functions / messages, 44
Monitoring parameters, 20
Monitoring the fail-safe functions, 194
Motor data identification, 31
Motor holding brake, 75
O
Open-loop control, 108
Overload responses, 50
P
Parameter
Attributes, 21
Index, 21
Parameter attribute
Access level, 22
Active, 25
BICO, 22
Can be changed, 23
Data type, 23
Grouping, 24
Quick commissioning, 25
Unit, 24
Value range, 26
Parameters
Data sets, 26
PID controller, 165
PID dancer roll control, 170
PID fixed setpoint, 175
PID motorized potentiometer, 174
Positioning ramp down, 38
power module monitor temperature and overload, 50
Power module protection, 49
Process dynamization, 195
R
Ramp-function generator, 86
Regenerative braking, 259
S
Safe Brake Control, 245
Safe Stop 1 function, 207
SafeTorque Off function, 203
Safety notes
General Warnings, Cautions and Notices, 10
Safety Instructions, 9
Setpoint channel, 82
Siemens standard Control, 155
Slip compensation, 116
SLS
mode 0, 216
mode 1, 224
mode 2, 232, 237
Speed controller, 138
speed encoder
Flying restart with, 64
Flying restart without, 63
Stall limiting, 150
switch-over from frequency to torque control, 147
T
Thermal monitoring functions, 50
Time controlled forced dynamization, 194
torque control
switch-over from frequency control, 147
Torque limiting, 149
V
V/f control, 109
Vdc_max controller, 262
Vector control, 122
with speed encoder, 132
without speed encoder, 124
Voltage boost, 113
www.siemens.com/sinamics-g120
We reserve the right to make technical
changes.
© Siemens AG 2011
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
